Porsche 911 Carrera Owners Manual 2006

Dr. Ing. h.c. F.
Porsche AG
Porsche, the Porsche crest, Carrera, PCCB, Tip-
tronic and Tequipment are registered trademarks
and the distinctive shapes of Porsche automobiles
are trademarks of
Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG.
All rights reserved.
Printed in Germany
WKD 997 021 06 5/ 05
2
Dear Owner,
We would like to thank you for your purchase of a
Porsche Sports car.
J udging by the car you have chosen, you are a mo-
torist of a special breed, and you are probably no
novice when it comes to automobiles.
Remember however, as with any vehicle, you
should take time to familiarize yourself with your
Porsche and its performance characteristics. Al-
ways drive within your own unique capabilities as
a driver and your level of experience with your
Porsche. Ensure that anyone else driving your
Porsche does the same. To prevent or minimize in-
jury, always use your safety belts. Never consume
alcohol or drugs before or during the operation of
your vehicle.
This Owners Manual contains a host of useful in-
formation. Please take the time to read this manu-
al before you drive your new Porsche. Become fa-
miliar with the operation of your Porsche car for
maximum safety and operating pleasure. The bet-
ter you know your Porsche, the more pleasure you
will experience driving your new car.
Always keep your Owners Manual in the car, and
give it to the new owner if you ever sell your
Porsche.
A separate Maintenance Booklet explains how
you can keep your Porsche in top driving condition
by having it serviced regularly.
A separate Warranty and Customer Informa-
tion Booklet contains detailed information about
the warranties covering your Porsche.
For U.S. only:
If you believe that your vehicle has a fault which
could cause a crash, injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Porsche Cars North America, Inc.
(Porsche Cars N.A.).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety prob-
lem exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a re-
call and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA can-
not become involved in individual problems be-
tween you and your dealer, or Porsche Cars N.A..
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-(800)-424-9393
(or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write
to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain oth-
er information about motor vehicle safety from the
Hotline.
Your car has thousands of parts and components
which have been designed and manufactured in
accordance with Porsches high standards of engi-
neering quality and safety.
Any alteration of the vehicle may negate or
interfere with those safety features built into
the vehicle.
Your Porsche is intended to be used in a safe man-
ner obeying the local laws and in the light of driv-
ing conditions faced by you, and in accordance
with the instructions provided in this Owners Man-
ual.
Do not misuse your Porsche by ignoring
those laws and driving conditions, or by
ignoring the instructions in this manual.
Any alteration or misuse of the vehicle can
lead to accidents and severe or fatal
personal injuries.
The fitting of racing tires (e.g. slicks) for sporting
events is not approved by Porsche. Very high cor-
nering speeds can be achieved with racing tires.
However, the resulting transverse acceleration
values would jeopardize the adequate supply of oil
to the engine.
Porsche therefore will not accept any warranty or
accept any liability for damage occurring as a re-
sult of non-compliance with this provision.
3
Regularly check your vehicle for signs of
damage.
Damaged or missing aerodynamic compo-
nents such as spoilers or underside panels
affect the driving behavior and therefore
must be replaced immediately.
Your car may have all or some of the components
described in this manual.
Should you have difficulty understanding any of
the explanations of features or equipment installed
in your vehicle, contact your authorized Porsche
dealer. He/ She will be glad to assist you. Also
check with your dealer on other available options
or equipment.
Throughout this booklet, left is designated as the
drivers side of the vehicle, and right as the pas-
sengers side of the vehicle.
Text, illustrations and specifications in this manual
are based on the information available at the time
of printing.
It has always been Porsches policy to continuous-
ly improve its products. Porsche, therefore, re-
serves the right to make changes in design and
specification, and to make additions or
improvements in its product without incurring any
obligation to install them on products previously
manufactured.
We wish you many miles of safe and pleasurable
driving in your Porsche.
Important
For your own protection and longer service life of
your car, please follow all operating instructions
and special warnings. These special warnings use
the safety alert symbol, followed by the words
Danger, Warning and Caution. These special
warnings contain important messages regarding
your safety and/ or the potential for damage to
your Porsche. Ignoring them could result in seri-
ous mechanical failure or even physical injury.
f Do not alter your Porsche. Any alteration could
create dangerous conditions or defeat safety
engineering features built into your car.
f Do not misuse your Porsche. Use it safely, and
consistently with the law, according to the driv-
ing conditions, and the instructions in this man-
ual.
Alteration or misuse of your Porsche could
cause accidents and severe or fatal personal
injuries.
Note to owners
In Canada, this manual is also available in French.
To obtain a copy contact your dealer or write to:
Note aux proprietaires
Au Canada on peut se procurer un exemplaire de
ce Manuel en franais auprs du concessionaire
ou du:
Porsche Cars Canada, Ltd.
Automobiles Porsche Canada, LTEE
5045 Orbitor Drive
Building #8, Suite 200
Mississauga, Ontario
Canada L4W4Y4
Telephone number for customer assistance:
1-800-PORSCHE / Option 3
4
Fuel Quality
Your engine is designed to provide optimum performance and fuel economy using
unleaded premium fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON (93 CLC or AKI).
Porsche therefore recommends the use of these fuels in your vehicle.
Porsche also recognizes that these fuels may not always be available. Be assured that your vehicle will operate
properly on unleaded premium fuels with octane numbers of at least 95 RON (90 CLC or AKI),
since the engines Electronic Oktane knock control will adapt the ignition timing, if necessary.
Fuels containing alcohol and ether
Some areas of the U.S. require oxygenated fuels during certain portions of the year.
Oxygenated fuels are fuels which contain alcohols (such as methanol or ethanol) or ether (such as MTBE).
Under normal conditions, the amount of these compounds in the fuel will not affect driveability.
You may use oxygenated fuels in your Porsche, provided the octane requirements for your vehicle are met.
We recommend, however, to change to a different fuel or station if any of the following problems occur with your vehicle:
Deterioration of driveability and performance.
Substantially reduced fuel economy.
Vapor lock and non-start problems, especially at high altitude or at high temperature.
Engine malfunction or stalling.
Fuels containing MMT
Some North American fuels contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
If such fuels are used, your emission control system performance may be negatively affected.
The check engine warning lights on your instrument panel may turn on.
If this occurs, Porsche recommends you stop using fuels containing MMT.
5
Tire Pressures for Cold Tires
Summer tires and snow tires 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S
Summer tires and snow tires 911 Carrera 4, 911 Carrera 4S
These tire pressures are valid only for Porsche approved tires.
For replacement tires it is imperative that you consult the Technical Data and Tires, Wheels
sections of this manual and followthe recommendations found there.
18 inch wheels front 36 psi (2.5 bar)
rear 44 psi (3.0 bar)
19 inch wheels, partially loaded front 33 psi (2.3 bar)
(up to 2 persons without luggage) rear 39 psi (2.7 bar)
19 inch wheels, fully loaded front 36 psi (2.5 bar)
(as of 2 persons with luggage) rear 44 psi (3.0 bar)
18 inch and 19 inch wheels, partially loaded front 33 psi (2.3 bar)
18 inch and 19 inch wheels, fully loaded front 36 psi (2.5 bar)
6
Porsche and the Environment
Environmental guidelines
We develop and produce exclusive sports cars
with advanced environmental and safety technolo-
gy and a great ability to fascinate.
Our environmental policy is based on the
following principles:
The maximum possible use of environmental
and safety technology that is economically jus-
tifiable.
Economical usage of energy and resources.
Involvement of our business partners and con-
tractors in our efforts to protect the environ-
ment.
Open dialogue with all social groups.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Warning!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and cer-
tain vehicle components contain or emit chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproduc-
tive harm.
Production
Whether in production or repair, Porsche always
relies on environmentally friendly technology.
An example of this is the water-based paint used
in our painting installations.
Water-base paints and new painting methods re-
duce solvent emissions by 70 per cent.
The water used in the painting installation is re-cir-
culated. Waste water leaves the Porsche factory
only after being appropriately treated.
A waste-management system has been introduced
to reduce the amount of waste while simultaneous-
ly increasing the recycling rate.
7
Environmentally friendly vehicles
Modern environmental technology ensures compli-
ance with all emission laws applicable worldwide.
These have the following advantages:
Rapid operational readiness of the catalytic
converters ensures low emissions, even in
short-trip operation.
Reliable operation and good emission control
over a long useful life.
f Please refer to the chapter FUEL ECONOMY
on page 207.
Recycling for a Porsche, this is virtually
an academic question
More than two-thirds of all Porsches ever built are
still running.
J ust in case recycling is ever necessary, we
take the following precautionary measures:
Identification of all materials.
Use of recyclable materials.
Reusable components designed for simple
removal.
These reasons result in a further increase in
the recycling rate which is currently 80 per
cent.
Emission control is built in
Innovative engine technology combines high en-
gine performance and environmental compati-
bility.
The engine diagnosis system electronically moni-
tors the components and systems that affect ex-
haust gases.
This continuous monitoring and fault storage ena-
bles swift, reliable diagnosis and fault detection.
Any fault messages are indicated to the driver by
the Check Engine warning light and the on-board
computer.
f Please refer to the chapter WARNINGS ON
THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-
BOARD COMPUTER on page 122.
8
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake
(PCCB)
The high-performance brake system is designed
for optimal braking effect at all speeds and
temperatures.
Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient
conditions (such as temperature and humidity)
therefore might cause brake noises.
Wear on the different components and braking
system, such as brake pads and brake discs,
depends to a great extent on the individual driving
style and the conditions of use and therefore
cannot be expressed in actual miles onthe road.
The values communicated by Porsche are based
on normal operation adapted to traffic. Wear
increases considerably when the vehicle is driven
on race tracks or through an aggressive driving
style.
f Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer
about the current guidelines in effect before
such use of your vehicle.
Setting and operating vehicle
components when driving
Warning!
There is a danger of accident if you set or op-
erate the on-board computer, radio, naviga-
tion system, telephone or other equipment
when driving.
This could distract you from the traffic and
cause you to lose control of the vehicle re-
sulting in serious personal injury or death.
f Operate the components while driving only if
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
f Carry out any complicated operating or setting
procedures only with the vehicle stationary.
Portable Fuel Containers
Danger!
Portable fuel containers, full or partially
empty, may leak, causing an explosion, or
result in fire in case of an accident.
f Never carry additional fuel in portable contain-
ers in your vehicle.
9
Engine Exhaust
Danger!
Engine exhaust is dangerous if inhaled.
Engine exhaust fumes have many compo-
nents which you can smell. They also contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is a colorless
and odorless gas.
Carbon monoxide can cause unconscious-
ness and even death if inhaled.
f Never start or let the engine run in an en-
closed, unventilated area.
It is not recommended to sit in your car for pro-
longed periods with the engine on and the car
not moving.
Ground Clearance
Please bear in mind the limited ground clearance
of your car on uneven surfaces, when parking
(curbs), on ramps, lifting platforms, towing etc.
10
11
Controls, Instruments 13 - 161
Shifting Gear 163 - 170
Mobile Roofs 171 - 195
Maintenance, Car Care 197 - 226
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 227 - 282
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 284 - 302
Index 304 - 308
12
Controls, Instruments 13
Controls, Instruments
Before driving off......................................... 14
Break in hints for the first
2,000 miles/ 3,000 kilometers...................... 16
Keys........................................................... 19
Security Wheel Bolts .................................... 19
Doors ......................................................... 21
Central Locking........................................... 22
Alarm System,
Passenger Compartment Monitoring ............. 26
Power Windows........................................... 28
Inside mirror................................................ 30
Door Mirrors................................................ 30
Rear Window Defogger,
Door Mirror Heating..................................... 33
Seat Adjustment .......................................... 34
Seat Memory............................................... 36
Heated Seats .............................................. 38
Rear Seat Backrests.................................... 39
Steering Wheel Adjustment........................... 39
Multi-Functional Steering Wheel ..................... 40
Sun Visors................................................... 41
Safety Belts................................................. 42
Airbag Systems........................................... 45
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 51
LATCH System
Child seat bracket on the passengers seat.... 55
Child Restraint Anchorages........................... 56
Rollover Protection System........................... 57
Parking Aids................................................ 58
Four-Wheel Drive.......................................... 61
Retractable Rear Spoiler............................... 63
Clutch Pedal................................................ 65
Parking Brake.............................................. 65
Brakes........................................................ 66
ABS Brake System
(Antilock Brake System)................................ 69
Sport Mode................................................. 71
Porsche Stability Management (PSM)............. 72
Porsche Active Suspension
Management (PASM).................................... 75
Interior Lights.............................................. 76
Operation, Instruments................................. 78
Ignition/ Starter Switch with anti-theft
Steering Lock.............................................. 80
Starting Procedures..................................... 82
Stopping Engine.......................................... 83
Instrument Panel USA Models ....................... 84
Instrument Panel Canada Models................... 86
Engine oil temperature................................. 88
Automatic Speed Control Indicator light......... 88
Instrument Illumination.................................. 88
Trip Odometer............................................. 89
Speedometer .............................................. 90
Changing over between
Miles / Kilometers........................................ 90
Tachometer................................................. 91
Turn Signal Indicator Light............................ 91
High Beam.................................................. 91
Cooling System........................................... 92
Tiptronic ......................................................93
Fuel ............................................................ 94
Clock.......................................................... 95
Outside temperature.................................... 95
Engine Oil Pressure...................................... 96
Check Engine
Warning Light .............................................. 97
On-Board Computer (BC) .............................. 98
Emergency Flasher Switch.......................... 130
Light Switch.............................................. 131
Welcome Home Lighting............................. 131
Automatic Headlight Beam Adjustment......... 132
Turn Signal / Headlight Dimmer /
Parking light / Flasher Lever ....................... 132
Windshield Wiper / Washer Lever ................ 133
Automatic Speed Control............................ 136
Automatic Air Conditioning System.............. 138
Central and Side Vents............................... 141
Fresh-air Intake.......................................... 141
Ashtray..................................................... 142
Cigarette Lighter........................................ 143
Cupholder ................................................. 144
Storage in the Passenger Compartment ...... 146
Luggage Compartment Lid and Engine
Compartment Lid....................................... 148
Luggage Compartment
(911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S)..................... 150
Luggage Compartment
(911 Carrera 4, 911 Carrera 4S)................ 151
Trunk Entrapment ...................................... 152
Fire Extinguisher........................................ 154
HomeLink.................................................. 155
Porsche Communication
Management (PCM).................................... 158
Car Telephone and
Aftermarket Alarms.................................... 161
14 Controls, Instruments
Dear Porsche Owner
A lot has gone into the manufacture of your
Porsche, including advanced engineering, rigid
quality control and demanding inspections.
These engineering and safety features will be
enhanced by you...
the safe driver...
who knows his car and all controls,
who maintains the vehicle properly,
who uses driving skills wisely and always
drives within her/ his own capabilities and the
level of familiarity with the vehicle.
You will find helpful hints in this manual on how to
perform most of the checks listed on the following
pages.
If in doubt, have these checks performed by your
authorized Porsche dealer.
Before driving off...
Check the following items first
f Turn the engine off before you attempt any
checks or repairs on the vehicle.
f Be sure the tires are inflated correctly.
Check tires for damage and tire wear.
f See that wheel bolts are properly tightened
and not loose or missing.
f Check engine oil level, add if necessary.
Make it a habit to have engine oil checked with
every fuel filling.
f Check all fluid levels such as windshield
washer and brake fluid levels.
f Be sure the vehicle battery is well charged and
cranks the engine properly.
f Check all doors and lids for proper operation
and latch them properly.
f Check, and if necessary replace worn or
cracked wiper blades.
f See that all windows are clear and unob-
structed.
f Check air intake slots and area between lug-
gage compartment lid and windshield are free
of snow and ice, so the heater and the wind-
shield wipers work properly.
f If a child will be riding in the vehicle, check
child seat/ child seat restraint system to ensure
that restraints are properly adjusted.
f Check all exterior and interior lights for opera-
tion and that the lenses are clean.
f Check the headlights for proper aim, and if
necessary, have them adjusted.
f Check under the vehicle for leaks.
f Be sure all luggage is stowed securely.
Emergency equipment
It is good practice to carry emergency equipment
in your vehicle.
Some of the items you should have are:
window scraper, snow brush, container or bag of
sand or salt, emergency light, small shovel, first-
aid kit, etc.
In the drivers seat...
f Check operation of the horn.
f Position seat for easy reach of foot pedals and
controls.
To reduce the possibility of injury from the
airbag deployment, you should always sit back
as far from the steering wheel as is practical,
while still maintaining full vehicle control.
f Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors.
f Buckle your safety belts.
f Check operation of the foot and parking brake.
f Check all warning and indicator lights with
ignition on and engine not running.
f Start engine and check all warning displays for
warning symbols.
f Never leave an idling car unattended.
f Lock doors from inside, especially with chil-
dren in the car to prevent inadvertent opening
of doors from inside or outside.
Drive with doors locked.
On the road...
f Never drive after you have consumed alcohol
or drugs.
f Always have your safety belt fastened.
f Always drive defensively.
Expect the unexpected.
f Use signals to indicate turns and lane changes.
f Turn on headlights at dusk or when the driving
conditions warrant it.
f Always keep a safe distance from the vehicle in
front of you, depending on traffic, road and
weather conditions.
f Reduce speed at night and during inclement
weather.
Driving in wet weather requires caution and re-
duced speeds, particularly on roads with
standing water, as the handling characteristics
of the vehicle may be impaired due to hydro-
planing of the tires.
f Always observe speed limits and obey road
signs and traffic laws.
f When tired, get well off the road, stop and take
a rest. Turn the engine off. Do not sit in the ve-
hicle with engine idling.
Please observe the chapter ENGINE EX-
HAUST on Page 9.
f When parked, always set the parking brake.
Move the Tiptronic selector lever to P or the
gearshift lever to reverse or first gear.
On hills also turn the front wheels toward the
curb.
f When emergency repairs become necessary,
move the vehicle well off the road. Turn on the
emergency flasher and use other warning de-
vices to alert other motorists. Do not park or
operate the vehicle in areas where the hot ex-
haust system may come in contact with dry
grass, brush, fuel spill or other flammable ma-
terial.
f Make it a habit to have the engine oil checked
after every fuel filling.
Break in hints for the first
2,000 miles/3,000 kilometers
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining opti-
mum performance from your new Porsche.
Despite the most modern, high-precision manufac-
turing methods, it cannot be completely avoided
that the moving parts have to wear in with each
other. This wearing-in occurs mainly in the first
2,000 miles/ 3,000 km.
Therefore:
f Preferably take longer trips.
f Avoid frequent cold starts with short-distance
driving whenever possible.
f Avoid full throttle starts and abrupt stops.
f Do not exceed maximum engine speed of
4,200 rpm (revolutions per minute).
f Do not run a cold engine at high rpm either in
Neutral or in gear.
f Do not let the engine labor, especially when
driving uphill. Shift to the next lower gear in
time (use the most favorable rpm range).
f Never lug the engine in high gear at low
speeds. This rule applies at all times, not just
during the break-in period.
f Do not participate in motor racing events,
sports driving schools, etc. during the first
2,000 miles/ 3,000 kilometers.
There may be a slight stiffness in the steering,
gear-shifting or other controls during the break-in
period which will gradually disappear.
Break in brake pads and brake discs
New brake pads and discs have to be broken in,
and therefore only attain optimal friction when the
car has covered several hundred miles or km.
The slightly reduced braking ability must be com-
pensated for by pressing the brake pedal harder.
This also applies whenever the brake pads and
brake discs are replaced.
New tires
New tires do not have maximum traction. They
tend to be slippery.
f Break in new tires by driving at moderate
speeds during the first 60 to 120 miles/ 100 to
200 km. Longer braking distances must be an-
ticipated.
Engine oil and fuel consumption
During the break-in period oil and fuel consump-
tion may be higher than normal.
As always, the rate of oil consumption depends on
the quality and viscosity of oil, the speed at which
the engine is operated, the climate and road con-
ditions, as well as the amount of dilution and oxi-
dation of the lubricant.
f Make a habit of checking engine oil with every
fuel filling, add if necessary.
1Inner door handle
2Power windows
3Door mirror control
4Light switch
5Ignition/ starter switch with steering lock
6Turn signal/ headlight dimmer,
flasher lever
7Operating lever for on-board computer
8Horn
9Emergency flasher switch,
central locking switch
10Switches for rear spoiler,
Porsche Active Suspension Management
(PASM), Sport mode,
Porsche Stability Management (PSM)
11Cupholder
12Switch for seat memory
13Diagnostic socket (OBD)
14Lid release
15Seat height adjustment
16Steering-wheel adjustment
17Backrest angle adjustment
18Seat fore and aft adjustment
Never invite car theft!
An unlocked car with the key in the ignition lock
invites car theft.
A steering wheel lock and a gong alarm are
standard equipment in your Porsche.
The gong alarm will sound if you open the drivers
door while the key is still in the ignition lock. It is
your reminder to pull the key out of the ignition
lock and to lock the doors.
Warning!
Any uncontrolled movement of the vehicle
may result in serious personal injury and
property damage.
Never leave your vehicle unattended with the
key in the ignition lock, especially if children
and/ or pets are left unattended in the vehi-
cle. They can operate power windows and
other controls. If the engine is left running,
they may accidentally engage the shift lever.
f Always remove the ignition key.
f Always set the parking brake.
f Lock the doors with the remote control.
Warning!
Risk of a serious accident.
The steering column will lock when you re-
move the key while you are driving or as the
car is rolling to a stop. You will not be able to
steer the car.
f Never remove the key from the steering lock
while you are driving.
To protect your vehicle and your possessions
from theft, you should always proceed as
follows when leaving your vehicle:
f Close windows.
f Close lifting/ sliding roof
f Close convertible top (with the convertible top
open, the passenger compartment monitoring
system is always switched off)
f Remove ignition key.
f Engage steering lock.
f Lock glove compartment.
f Remove valuables (e.g. car documents, tele-
phone, house keys) from the car.
f Lock doors.
Keys
f Please observe the chapter ALARM SYSTEM,
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT MONITORING
on Page 26.
f Please observe the chapter CENTRAL LO-
CKING on Page 22.
Two main keys and one spare key are supplied
with your Porsche.
These keys operate all the locks on your vehicle.
f Be careful with your car keys: do not part with
them except under exceptional circumstances.
f To avoid battery run-down, always remove the
ignition key from the ignition lock.
Replacement keys
Replacement car keys can be obtained only from
your authorized Porsche dealer, and this can
sometimes be very time-consuming.
You should therefore always keep the spare key on
your person.
Keep it in a safe place (e.g. wallet), but under no
circumstances in or on the vehicle.
The key codes of new keys have to be reported
to the car control unit by your authorized Porsche
dealer.
Disabling key codes
If a key is lost, the key codes can be disabled by
an authorized Porsche dealer.
All the remaining car keys are required for this pur-
pose.
Disabling the code ensures that the car can be
started only using authorized keys.
Note
f Please note that the other locks can still be
opened with the disabled key.
Immobilizer
There is a transponder (an electronic component)
in the key grip, containing a stored code.
When the ignition is switched on, the ignition lock
checks the code.
The immobilizer can be deactivated and the en-
gine started only using an authorized ignition key.
Switching off the immobilizer
f Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock.
If the ignition is left on for more than 2 minutes
without the engine being started, the immobilizer
is reactivated.
f If this happens, turn the ignition key back to the
3 position before starting the engine.
Please observe the chapter IGNITION/
STARTER SWITCH WITH ANTI-THEFT
STEERING LOCK on Page 80.
Switching on the immobilizer
Security Wheel Bolts
f If wheels have to be removed during a work-
shop visit, do not forget to hand over the sock-
et for the security wheel bolts along with the
car key.
A- Main key
1- Central locking button
2- Luggage compartment lid button
3- Light-emitting diode
B- Spare key
Key with Radio Remote Control
Unlocking the vehicle
f Press button 1.
Locking the vehicle
f Press button 1.
Switching off the alarm system if it is
triggered accidentally
f Unlock the vehicle.
Unlocking luggage compartment lid
f Press button 2 for approx. two seconds.
If the vehicle was locked, it is unlocked simultane-
ously with the luggage compartment.
In vehicles with seat memory the stored seat and
door mirror positions are automatically set.
The vehicle will be locked again approx.
15 seconds after the luggage compartment is
closed if none of the doors was opened.
Note
Your authorized Porsche dealer can program fur-
ther types of unlocking.
Type 1
The relocking time of the doors can be adjusted to
suit your individual requirements:
10 - 100 seconds.
Type 2
The doors stay locked when the luggage compart-
ment is unlocked.
The remote-control standby function
switches off after 7 days
If the vehicle is not started or unlocked with the re-
mote control within 7 days, the remote control
standby function is switched off (to prevent dis-
charging of the vehicle battery).
1. In this case, unlock the drivers door with the
key at the door lock.
Leave the door closed in order to prevent the
alarm system from being triggered.
2. Press button 1 on the remote control.
The remote control is now activated again.
Note
f Do not insert the ignition key into the ignition
lock if the vehicle battery is discharged.
The ignition key can no longer be removed.
The key cannot be removed until the vehicle elec-
trical system is supplied with power again.
f Please observe the chapter EMERGENCY UN-
LOCKING OF THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
LID on Page 257.
f Please observe the chapter EMERGENCY
STARTING WITH J UMPER CABLES on
Page 264.
Doors
If the door windows are closed, they will be auto-
matically opened by a few millimeters when the
doors are opened and, when the doors are closed,
they will be closed again. This makes it easier to
open and close the doors and protects the seals.
f Therefore, you should pull the door handle
slowly so that the door window can be lowered
before the door is opened.
Opening doors fromoutside
f Unlock vehicle with the remote control.
f Slowly pull door handle A.
Opening unlocked doors frominside
f Slowly pull door handle B.
Opening locked doors frominside
f Slowly pull door handle B twice.
f Please observe the chapter LOCKING CONDI-
TIONS on Page 23.
Door storage tray
Opening storage tray
f Open the cover.
Always keep the door storage tray C closed, so
that the side airbag is not obstructed in the event
of an accident.
Central Locking
This device complies with:
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two condi-
tions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio
or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifi-
cations to this equipment.
Such modification could void the users authority
to operate the equipment.
Warning!
Any changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by Porsche could void the users authority
to operate this equipment.
f Please observe the chapter LOAD SWITCH-
OFF AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS on
Page 255.
f Please observe the chapter SEAT MEMORY
on Page 36.
Both car doors and the filler flap can be centrally
unlocked or locked with the remote control.
The vehicle cannot be locked if the drivers door is
not completely closed.
A short signal from the alarm horn will draw
your attention to the fact that the following
components are not completely closed when you
try to lock the vehicle:
Passengers door
Luggage compartment lid
Engine compartment lid
Glove compartment
Unlocking the vehicle by using the key in the door
lock and opening the door may activate the alarm
system within 10 seconds.
Note
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono package, the
PCM can be used to activate automatic door
locking.
Please observe the chapter Individual Memory in
the separate PCM operating instructions.
Automatic relocking
If the car is unlocked by remote control and none
of the car doors is opened within approx.
60 seconds, automatic relocking takes place.
This relocking time can be adapted to your individ-
ual requirements (10 - 100 seconds) by an author-
ized Porsche dealer.
Locking conditions
f Lock car once.
The doors cannot be opened from the outside.
Alarm system and passenger compartment
monitoring are switched on.
If a person or animal remains in the vehicle:
f Quickly lock car twice.
The doors cannot be opened from the outside.
The passenger compartment monitoring is
switched off.
Unlocking the door with the inner door
handle
Any person remaining in the locked car can open
the door with the inner door handle:
1. Pull inner door handle once to unlock door
lock.
2. Pull inner door handle again to open door.
Note
f Inform any person remaining in the car that the
alarm system will be triggered if the door is
opened.
Malfunction of the remote control
The remote control may not function correctly due
to local radio wave interference. The vehicle will
then not lock properly.
This can be identified by the missing locking
sound and the missing check-back signal of the
emergency flasher.
If this should occur:
f Lock the vehicle with the key in the door.
Emergency operation opening
f Unlock the drivers door with the key at the
door lock.
Open door within 20 seconds and insert the
ignition key into the ignition lock within
10 seconds to prevent the alarm system from
being triggered.
Note on operation
If the door is not opened within approx.
20 seconds, automatic relocking takes place.
The alarm system will be triggered by the next
unlocking of the door:
f Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock to
switch off the alarm system.
Emergency operation closing
f Lock the drivers door with the key at the door
lock.
If there is a defect in the central locking sys-
tem, all functioning elements of the central
locking system will be locked.
The alarm system is switched on.
The passenger compartment monitoring sys-
tem is switched off.
The fault should be remedied immediately at an
Indication by emergency flasher and
alarmhorn
If the remote control is used for unlocking or
locking, a response is provided by the emergency
flasher:
Unlocking single flash.
Locking double flash.
Locking twice continuous illumination for ap-
prox. 2 seconds.
Fault indication
A double horn signal during locking indicates a
defect in the central locking or alarm system.
Have the defect remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Overload protection
If the central locking system is operated more
than ten times within a minute, further operation is
blocked for 30 seconds.
Central locking button
The central locking button on the dashboard lets
you lock and unlock both doors electrically.
Note
If the doors are locked with the key or remote con-
trol, they can not be opened by pressing the cen-
tral locking button.
Locking
f Press the central locking button.
Indicator light in the button lights up if ignition
is on.
Unlocking
f Press the central locking button.
Indicator light goes out.
If the doors were locked with the central locking
button, they can be opened by pulling the inner
door handle:
lock.
Automatic door locking
Your authorized Porsche dealer can program di-
verse types of automatic door locking in the con-
trol unit of the central locking system:
Type 1
Doors lock automatically when the ignition is
switched on.
Type 2
Doors lock automatically when a speed of
3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/ h) is exceeded.
Type 3
Doors lock automatically when the ignition is
switched on. If doors are opened with the engine
running, they lock again automatically when a
speed of 3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/ h) is exceeded.
Type 4
The doors do not lock automatically.
Note
Automatically locked doors can be unlocked with
the central locking button or opened by pulling on
the inside door handle twice.
PCM can be used to activate automatic door lock-
ing.
Warning!
In an emergency situation where you need to
exit the car through an automatically locked
door, remember the following procedure to
open the door.
f Unlock the doors by pressing the central lock-
ing button or
f pull the inside door handle twice to open the
door.
A- Light-emitting diode for alarmsystem
Alarm System,
Passenger Compartment
Monitoring
This device complies with:
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two condi-
tions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio
or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifi-
cations to this equipment.
Such modification could void the users authority
to operate the equipment.
Warning!
Any changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by Porsche could void the users authority
to operate this equipment.
The alarm system and passenger compartment
monitoring system are switched on when the
doors are locked with the key or remote control.
f Please observe the chapter CENTRAL LO-
CKING on Page 22.
Unlocking the vehicle by using the key in the
door lock and opening the door may activate
the alarm system within 10 seconds.
Cabriolet
The passenger compartment monitoring system
is always switched off when the convertible top is
open.
Function indication
If the alarm system is activated, light-emitting
diode A in the central locking switch flashes.
If, after locking, the light-emitting diode does not
flash or, after ten seconds, it emits double flash-
es, then not all alarm contacts are closed.
Additionally, a brief horn signal sounds.
When the doors are unlocked, the alarm system
and passenger compartment monitoring system
are switched off and the light-emitting diode goes
off.
When the alarmis armed, the following
areas are monitored
Doors
Luggage compartment lid
Engine compartment lid
Convertible-top lock (Cabriolet)
Glove compartment
Passenger compartment
If one of these alarm contacts is interrupted, the
alarm horn sounds for approximately 3 minutes.
Additionally, the emergency flasher flashes and
the passenger compartment light lightes for ap-
proximately five minutes.
When the alarm is triggered, the light-emitting
diode changes over to double flashes.
In order not to limit the action range of the passen-
ger compartment monitoring system:
f Do not fold the front seat backrests forward.
Deactivating the passenger compartment
monitoring systemfor one locking
process
If a person or animal remains in the car while it is
locked, the passenger compartment monitoring
system must be switched off.
f Quickly lock car twice.
The doors are locked but can be opened from
the inside:
lock.
Note
f Inform any person remaining in the car that the
alarm system will be triggered if the door is
opened.
Fault indication
A double horn signal during locking indicates a
defect in the central locking or alarm system.
f Have the defect remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
A - Power window in drivers door
B - Power window in passengers door
C - Cabriolet: Switching button for front/ rear power
windows
Power Windows
Warning!
Risk of injury when the door windows close.
This applies especially if the windows are
closed with the one-touch operation, be-
cause with this function the windowgoes up
automatically.
f Make sure nobody can be injured when the
windows close.
f Remove the ignition key to shut off power to
the window switches when the vehicle is not
attended by a responsible person. Uninformed
persons could injure themselves by operating
the power windows.
f Do not leave children in the car unattended.
Risk of an accident.
f Do not put anything on or near the windows
that may interfere with the drivers vision.
Readiness for operation of power windows
When the ignition is switched on
(engine switched on or off) or
with doors closed and ignition key withdrawn,
but only until door is first opened.
One-touch operation for closing the door
windows is available only when the ignition is
switched on.
Cabriolet
When the convertible top is open, the rear side
windows can only be closed if the door windows
are closed.
Opening/closing windows
f For the Cabriolet, select front or rear power
windows with rocker switch C.
The selection is displayed by the respective
light-emitting diode.
The two rocker switches in the drivers door and
the switch in the passengers door have a two-
stage function:
Opening windowwith the rocker switch
f Press the rocker switch down to the first stage
until the window has reached the desired
position.
Closing windowwith the rocker switch
f Press the rocker switch upwards to the first
stage until the window has reached the desired
position.
One-touch operation
f Press the rocker switch upwards or
downwards to the second stage.
Window moves to its final position.
Press again to stop the window in the desired
position.
Coup
One-touch operation for closing the passengers
window is available once the window is approxi-
mately half-way closed.
Comfort function when unlocking the vehicle
f Unlock car with the remote control.
Hold car key in door lock in the unlocking direc-
tion until the windows have reached the
desired position.
Anti-crushing protection
If a side window is blocked during closing, it will
stop and open again by about an inch.
Warning!
Risk of severe personal injuries.
If the rocker switch is pressed again within
10 seconds of the windowbeing blocked, the
windowwill close with its full closing force.
Anti-crushing protection is disabled.
f Once the anti-crushing protection acts to stop
the window and opens it slightly, do not press
the rocker switch again within 10 seconds
without checking to make sure that nothing is
blocking the path of the window.
The window will close with full closing force.
One-touch operation is disabled for 10 seconds
after blockage of a side window.
Automatic window lowering
f Please observe the chapter DOORS on
Page 21.
Storing end position of the windows
If the battery is disconnected and reconnected,
the windows will not be raised automatically when
the door is closed.
1. Close the windows with the rocker switch
once.
2. Press the rocker switch upwards again to store
the end position of the windows in the control
unit.
Inside mirror
When the mirror is being adjusted, the anti-glare le-
ver must point forward.
Basic position: lever forward
Anti-glare position: lever back
Door Mirrors
Before driving the vehicle, adjust the outside and
inside mirrors.
It is important for safe driving that you have good
vision to the rear.
Warning!
f Do not put anything on or near the windows or
the mirrors that may interfere with the drivers
vision.
Adjusting
1. Switch on ignition.
2. By turning the control switch A, select the driv-
ers side or the passengers side.
3. Move the door mirror glasses in the appropri-
ate direction by tilting the control switch.
If the electrical adjustment facility fails
f Adjust mirror by pressing on the mirror face.
Automatically swivelling down mirror on
the passengers side
f Please observe the chapter PARKING AIDS
on Page 58.
on Page 36.
Folding in door mirrors
Warning!
Danger of injury to fingers if the mirror
accidentally flips back when being folded in.
f Exercise extreme caution when folding in
mirror by hand. Do not let go of the mirror
before the locking lever is locked or the mirror
is fully unfolded.
1. Push mirror towards the door window and
continue to hold it (high spring force).
2. Swivel the locking lever up to the stop and
slowly let go of the mirror.
Unfolding door mirrors
1. Push mirror towards the door window and
continue to hold it (high spring force). The
locking lever disengages automatically.
2. Move mirror back to unfolded position by hand.
Do not let go of the mirror beforehand.
A- Sensor
B- Switch for automatic anti-glare operation
C- Light-emitting diode
Automatic Anti-Glare Interior
Mirror and Door Mirror
Sensors on the front and rear sides of the interior
mirror measure the incident light.
The mirrors automatically change to anti-glare po-
sition or revert to their normal state, depending on
the light intensity.
When reverse gear is selected, automatic anti-
glare operation is switched off.
Note
The incident light in the area of the sensors must
not be restricted, e.g. by stickers on the wind-
shield.
Switching off the automatic anti-glare
operation
f Press switch B.
Light-emitting diode C goes out.
Switching on the automatic anti-glare
operation
f Press switch B.
Light-emitting diode C lights up.
Warning!
Risk of injury. Electrolyte fluid can emerge
from a broken mirror glass.
This fluid irritates the skin and eyes.
f If the electrolyte fluid should come into contact
with the eyes or skin, immediately rinse it off
with clean water.
See a doctor if necessary.
Risk of damage to the paintwork, leather and
plastic parts. Electrolyte fluid can be re-
moved only while it is still wet.
f Clean the affected parts with water.
The mirror heater is ready for operation when the
ignition is on.
Switching on
f Press button.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
After approx. 15 minutes, the heater switches off
automatically.
The heater can be switched back on by pressing
the button again.
Switching off
f Press button.
The light-emitting diode in the button goes out.
Rear Window Defogger,
Door Mirror Heating
Seat Adjustment
Warning!
The seat may move unexpectedly if you
attempt to adjust while driving. This could
cause sudden loss of control or personal in-
jury.
f Do not adjust seats while the vehicle is in mo-
tion.
The backrest locks must be engaged at all
times while the vehicle is in motion.
Safety belts only offer protection when the
backrest is upright and the belts are properly
positioned on the body.
Improperly positioned safety belts or safety
belts worn by passengers in an excessively
reclined position can cause serious personal
injury in an accident.
f Do not operate the car with the driver or
passenger backrests excessively reclined
(see Seat position).
In the cabriolet, the windstop may be
damaged during seat adjustment and when
folding back the front-seat backrest.
f Adjust seat so that the seat backrest does not
touch the windstop.
Seat position
An ergonomically correct sitting position is
important for safe and fatigue-free driving.
We recommend the following procedure for adjust-
ing the drivers seat to suit individual
requirements:
1. Vehicles with manual transmission:
Adjust the seat until, with the clutch pedal fully
depressed, your leg remains at a slight angle.
Vehicles with Tiptronic S:
Adjust the seat until, with your left foot on the
footrest, your left leg remains at a slight angle.
2. Rest your outstretched arm on the steering
wheel.
Set the backrest angle and the steering-wheel
position so that your wrist rests on the outer
rim of the steering wheel. At the same time,
the shoulders must still be in noticeable
contact with the backrest.
3. Adjust the seat height to give yourself enough
headroom and a good overview of the vehicle.
4. Electrically adjustable seat:
Adjust the seat angle until your thighs rest
lightly on the seat cushion.
Manually adjustable
comfort seat/sports seat
A Seat height
f Use lever A in a pumping movement:
Upwards seat moves upwards
Downwards seat moves downwards
B Fore and aft
f Raise locking lever B.
Move seat to desired position and release
lever.
Ensure that the seat engages correctly.
C Backrest angle
f Operate switch C until the desired backrest
angle is reached.
Electrically adjustable
comfort seat/sports seat
f Press the switch in the direction indicated by
the arrow until the desired setting is reached.
A Seat height adjustment
B Fore-and-aft position adjustment
C Seat angle adjustment
D Backrest angle adjustment
E Lumbar support
(pelvis and spinal column support)
To permit a relaxed sitting posture, the backrest
curvature is continuously adjustable in vertical and
horizontal directions for individual pelvis and
spinal column support.
f Press the switch in the direction indicated by
the arrow until the desired backrest curvature
is reached.
F Adjusting the backrest side bolsters
(electrically adjustable sports seat only)
f Push forward or pull backward switch F until
the side bolsters are adjusted to the shape of
the body.
G Adjusting the seat cushion side bolsters
(electrically adjustable sports seat only)
f Push forward or pull backward switch G until
the side bolsters are adjusted to the shape of
the body.
Seat backrest
Folding forward
f Pull up lever H in the side part of the backrest
and fold the backrest forward.
Folding back
f Tilt back and engage the backrest so that it
cannot tip forward when the car is braked.
M - Memory button
1 - Key button
2, 3 - Person buttons
Seat Memory
Individual seat and door mirror settings can be
stored and recalled for the drivers position.
Further individual setting options are available in
vehicles with the Sport Chrono package.
Warning!
Risk of crushing due to uncontrolled recall of
a seat setting.
f Cancel automatic adjustment by pressing any
of the seat adjustment buttons.
f Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended.
Operation with person buttons 2, 3
Storing seat position
1. Switch on ignition.
Reverse gear must not be engaged.
2. Set the desired seat and door-mirror positions.
3. Keep memory button M depressed and
additionally press person button 2 or 3.
The individual setting is now stored under the
desired person button.
Recalling seat position
1. Switch on the ignition or
open the drivers door.
2. Press person button until the seat has reached
its final position.
The setting of door mirrors and lumbar
support will be completed even if the person
button is not kept depressed.
Note
Automatic seat adjustment can be interrupted
immediately by releasing the button.
Operating with the remote control of the
vehicle key
Each remote control (up to six) can be assigned an
individual seat and door mirror position.
The stored seat and door mirror position is set au-
tomatically when the vehicle is unlocked using the
corresponding remote control.
Storing seat position
1. Switch the ignition on with the desired vehicle
key.
Reverse gear must not be engaged.
2. Set the desired seat and door-mirror positions.
additionally press key button 1.
The individual setting is now assigned to this
remote control and to the key button.
Storing individual lowered position of the
passengers door mirror as a parking aid
Once the driver's seat setting has been stored, an
individual lowered position of the passenger's
door mirror may be stored for driving in reverse:
1. Apply the handbrake.
key.
3. Engage reverse gear.
4. Select passenger side with mirror switch.
The passengers mirror swivels downwards.
5. Set passengers door mirror to desired final
position.
additionally press key button 1.
The individual setting is now assigned to this
remote control and to the key button.
Recalling seat position
f Unlock the locked vehicle or the luggage
compartment with the remote control.
The stored seat position is automatically set.
The seat position assigned to a remote control
can also be recalled with the key button 1 if the
corresponding key was used to switch on the
ignition.
If no seat position has been assigned to a remote
control, the key button will not work.
Note on operation
Automatic seat adjustment can be interrupted
immediately:
by switching on the ignition,
by pressing the central locking button,
by pressing any memory or seat adjustment
button.
Clearing the stored seat position
key.
2. Press memory button twice and key button 1
once consecutively.
A- Seat heating, left
B- Seat heating, right
Heated Seats
Two-stage seat heating is ready for operation
when the ignition is on.
Switching on
High heating power
f Press button.
Both light-emitting diodes in the button light up.
Lowheating power
f Press the rocker-switch symbol again.
One light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
Switching off
f Press button.
Light-emitting diodes go out.
Rear Seat Backrests
Extra storage space is gained by folding the rear
seat backrests forward.
Folding forward
f Pull lever forward and fold the backrest
forward.
Folding back
f Tilt the backrest back until you feel it click into
place. When doing so, make sure that the seat
belt is properly routed (see figure).
Cabriolet
f Do not fold up the rear seat backrests with the
windstop installed.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Warning!
Risk of accident.
The steering wheel may move further than
desired if you attempt to adjust it when
driving.
You can lose control of the vehicle.
f Do not adjust the steering wheel when driving.
Adjusting steering wheel height and
longitudinal direction
1. Push the locking lever downwards.
2. Adjust steering wheel to fit the chosen
backrest angle and your seat position by
moving the steering wheel up or down and
longitudinally.
3. Swivel locking lever back until you feel it en-
gage.
If necessary, move steering wheel slightly lon-
gitudinally.
Multi-Functional Steering Wheel
Warning!
There is a danger of accident if you set or
operate the on-board computer, radio,
navigation system, telephone or other
equipment when driving.
Operating these devices while driving could
distract you from traffic and cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
f Operate these components while driving only if
procedures only while the vehicle is stationary.
Depending on the equipment in your vehicle, you
can use the function keys of the multi-functional
steering wheel to operate the following Porsche
communication systems:
PCM
Telephone
CD changer
Readiness for operation of multi-
functional steering wheel
The multi-functional steering wheel is ready for
operation when the ignition and PCM are switched
on.
Operating the function keys
f Please read the separate PCM operating
instructions before operating the function
keys.
The rotary knobs at the top left and right of the
steering wheel can also be pressed.
Turn volume control
Upwards increase volume.
Downwards decrease volume.
Press volume control
To switch volume/ mute on and off.
Turn rotary knob
To select/ mark function in the PCM within
a menu. To do this, turn the rotary knob
upward or downward.
Press rotary knob
To activate selected function.
Press screen button
To call the stored PCM function.
The button can be assigned the desired
function in the PCM.
Press Back button
To move back in the PCM menu.
Press Handset Pickup button
To accept a telphone call.
Press Gandset Hangup button
To end or refuse a telephone call.
Sun Visors
f Swing the sun visors down to prevent glare
from the front.
f To prevent glare from the side, unclip the sun
visor from the inner bracket and swivel round
so that it is in front of the door window.
Vanity mirror
The vanity mirror on the rear of the sun visor is
covered by a lid.
Warning!
Risk of injury.
f Keep the lid closed while driving and when
closing the convertible top.
Risk of damage.
f Do not force the lid beyond its end position.
The vanity mirror illumination is switched on auto-
matically when the cover is opened (arrow).
Safety Belts
Warning!
Always make sure your and your passengers
safety belts are properly fastened while the
vehicle is in motion.
Failure to followsafety belt warnings may re-
sult in serious personal injury or death.
f For your and your passengers protection, use
safety belts at all times while the vehicle is in
motion.
f Use appropriate child restraint systems for all
small children.
Proper wearing of safety belts
f Safety belts must be positioned on the body as
to restrain the upper body and lap from sliding
forward. Improperly positioned safety belts
can cause serious personal injury or death in
case of an accident.
f The shoulder belt should always rest on your
upper body. The shoulder belt should never be
worn behind your back or under your arm.
f For maximum effectiveness, the lap belt
should be worn low across the hips.
f Pregnant women should position the belt as
low as possible across the pelvis. Make sure it
is not pressing against the abdomen.
f Belts should not be worn twisted.
f Do not wear belts over rigid or breakable ob-
jects in or on your clothing, such as eye glass-
es, pens, keys, etc. as these may cause injury.
f Several layers of heavy clothing may interfere
with proper positioning of belts.
f Belts must not rub against sharp objects or
damage may occur to the belt.
f Two occupants should never share the same
belt at the same time.
Care and maintenance
f Keep belt buckles free of any obstruction that
may prevent a secure locking.
f Belts that have been subjected to excessive
stretch forces in an accident must be inspect-
ed or replaced to ensure their continued effec-
tiveness in restraining you.
The same applies to belt tensioner systems
which have been triggered.
In addition, the anchor points of the belts
should be checked.
f If safety belts do not work properly, see your
authorized Porsche dealer immediately.
f If the belts show damage to webbing, bindings,
buckles or retractors, they should be replaced
to ensure safe operation.
f Do not modify or disassemble the safety belts
in your vehicle.
f The belts must be kept clean or the retractors
may not work properly.
Please observe the chapter CAR CARE IN-
STRUCTIONS on Page 218.
f Never bleach or dye safety belts.
f Do not allow safety belts to retract until they
are completely dry after cleaning or this may
cause damage to the belt.
Belt tensioner
Depending on the force of an impact, fastened
safety belts are tightened in an accident.
The belt tensioners are triggered in:
Front, side and rear impacts of sufficient
severity.
For the Cabriolet, in cases of vehicle rollover.
Note
The belt-tensioner system can be triggered only
once; the system must be replaced afterward.
If there is a fault in the belt-tensioner system, the
airbag warning light lights up.
Work may be performed on the belt-tensioner sys-
tem only by an authorized Porsche dealer.
Smoke is released when the belt tensioners are
triggered. This does not indicate a fire in the
vehicle.
An audio-visual warning system is interconnect-
ed with the drivers safety belt.
Every time the ignition is turned on, the gong will
sound for about 6 seconds to remind driver and
passenger to buckle up.
In addition, the gong will sound for approx. 90 sec-
onds if vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph/ 24 km/ h.
The safety belt warning lights in the instrument
panel and on-board computer will go off as soon
as the driver has buckled up.
Inertia reel retractor
The combination lap/ shoulder belt with inertia reel
locking mechanism adjusts automatically to your
size and movements as long as the pull on the belt
is slow.
Rapid deceleration during hard braking or a colli-
sion locks the belt. The belt will also lock when you
drive up or down a steep hill or in a sharp curve,
otherwise, the shoulder belt will not inhibit your
upper body movement.
Fastening the safety belt
f Assume a comfortable sitting position.
The shoulder belt should always rest on your
upper body. The shoulder belt should never be
worn behind your back or under your arm.
f Grasp belt and pull the belt in a continuous
slow motion across your chest and lap.
f Insert belt tongue into buckle on inboard side
of seat. Push down until it securely locks with
an audible click. Pull the belt to check.
f Pull shoulder section to make sure belt fits
snugly across the pelvis.
f Belts should fit snugly across the pelvis and
chest. Make sure there is no slack in the belt.
Releasing the safety belt
f Push in release button (arrow) on buckle. Belt
tongue will spring out of buckle.
f To release a latched belt, lean back to take the
body pressure off the belt.
f To store lap/ shoulder belt, allow the belt to re-
tract as you guide the latch to its stowed posi-
tion.
f Please observe the chapter AUTOMATIC LO-
CKING RETRACTOR on Page 54.
f f f
Safety Belt Warning System
Safety belt height adjustment
(Coup only)
The height of the belt deflectors for the drivers
seat and passengers seat can be adjusted.
Adjust the height of the safety belt so that it runs
across the middle of the shoulder, not against the
neck.
Adjusting belt height
f Upward push belt deflector up.
f Downward press button (arrow) and move
belt deflector.
Cleaning the safety belts
f Please observe the chapter SAFETY BELTS
on Page 226.
Airbag Systems
The airbags in combination with the safety belts
make up a safety system which offers the driver
and the passenger the greatest known protection
from injuries in case of accident.
Your vehicle is equipped with a weight sensing sys-
tem for the front passenger's seat in accordance
with U.S. Federal/ Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 208.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the
safety belts must be worn at all times,
because the front airbag system is only deployed
by frontal collisions with an impact of sufficient se-
verity.
Below the deployment threshold of the airbag sys-
tem, and during types of collisions which do not
cause the actuation of the system, the safety belts
provide the primary protection to the occupants
when correctly worn.
Therefore, all persons within the vehicle
must wear safety belts at all times (in many
states, state law requires the use of safety belts).
f Please observe the chapter SAFETY BELTS
on Page 42.
The front airbags are located under the padded
steering wheel panel on the drivers side and, on
the passenger's side, in the dashboard.
The side airbags for the front seats are installed
on the side in the seat backrests.
The head airbags are installed in the door linings.
Danger!
To provide optimal occupant protection, air-
bags must inflate at very high speed. If you
are not wearing your safety belt or are too
close to the airbag when it is deployed, inflat-
ing airbags can result in serious personal in-
jury or death.
Improper handling of the weight sensing sys-
tem can unintentionally impair switching the
passenger's airbag off and on.
f Make sure there are no people, animals or ob-
jects between the driver or passenger and the
area into which the airbag inflates.
f Sit back as far from the dashboard or steering
wheel as is practical, while still maintaining full
vehicle control.
f Always hold the steering wheel by the outer
rim. Never rest your hands on the airbag panel.
f Always fasten seat belts because triggering
of the airbag system depends on the force and
angle of impact.
f Do not transport heavy objects on or in front of
the passengers seat. These could impair the
function of the airbag, the seat belts, and
weight sensing.
f Do not hang objects (e.g. jackets, coats, coat
hangers) over the backrest.
f Always keep the lid of the door storage com-
partment closed. Objects must not protrude
out of the door storage compartment.
f No changes may be made to the wiring or
components of the airbag system.
f Do not add any additional coverings or stickers
to the steering wheel or in the area of the pas-
sengers airbag, side airbags and head air-
bags. Doing so may adversely affect the func-
tioning of the airbag system or cause harm to
the occupants if the airbag system should de-
ploy.
f Do not modify the seat coverings. Do not at-
tach additional cushions, protective coverings,
or pillows to the passenger's seat. Do not affix
things to the passenger's seat or cover it with
other materials. Do not cover the back of the
backrest. Do not make changes to the passen-
ger's seat and to the seat base frame.
f Do not undertake any wiring for electrical ac-
cessory equipment in the vicinity of the airbag
wiring harnesses. Doing so may disable the air-
bag system or cause inadvertent inflation.
f If the warning light comes on, the airbag sys-
tem should be repaired immediately by your
f Always keep feet in the footwell while driving.
Do not put feet on the dashboard or the seat
area. Do not lean against the inside of the door
or outside the window while the vehicle is mov-
ing.
f Using accessories not approved by Porsche
can cause the weight sensing system to be im-
paired.
f Do not squeeze objects, such as the fire extin-
guisher, or first aid kit under the seat.
f Only have seats removed and installed by an
authorized Porsche dealer so that weight sens-
ing components will not be damaged.
f Give your passenger all of the information in
this chapter.
Note
Airbag components (e.g. steering wheel, door lin-
ing, seats) may be disassembled only by an autho-
rized Porsche dealer.
When disposing of a used airbag unit, our safety
instructions must be followed. These instructions
can be obtained at any authorized Porsche dealer.
Function of the airbag system
The front airbags are triggered during a frontal col-
lision of sufficient force and direction.
In the event of a side impact of corresponding
force, the side airbag on the impact side is
triggered.
The inflation process generates the amount of gas
required to fill the airbags at the necessary pres-
sure in fractions of a second.
Airbags protect the head and upper body, while si-
multaneously damping the motion of the driver
and passenger in the impact direction in the event
of a frontal impact or side impact.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module. This module will record the
use of the seat belt restraint system by the driver
and front passenger when the airbags and/ or belt
tensioner work.
Advanced Airbag
tem for the passenger's seat in accordance with
U.S. Federal/ Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard 208.
Depending on the weight acting on the front pas-
senger's seat, the front passenger's airbag will au-
tomatically be switched on and off.
Depending on the angle and force of impact, the
front passenger's airbag which is activated will be
triggered during a collision.
Precondition for switching the front passenger's
airbag on and off, depending on weight:
Vehicles equipped with key-operated airbag
deactivation device:
Switch position AUTO.
Ignition key is inserted.
Seat adjustment for the front passenger's
seat
If the seat is in an extreme position (e.g., the back-
rest is in contact with the rear seat), the backrest
can warp. Warping of the backrest can lead to mal-
functions.
f Correct the seat adjustment.
Ensure that the seat is not jammed and is self-
supporting.
Ensure that the backrest is in the upright posi-
tion.
f Do not transport a load and objects in the rear
footwell and under the passenger's seat.
If the load or objects are under the seat, it can
cause malfunctions.
If the weight on the passenger's seat is reduced
significantly, e.g., by supporting weight on the
armrest, the passenger's airbag can be switched
off.
f Select an upright seat position, and do not sup-
port weight on the armrests or lean out of the
window.
Always keep feet in the footwell while driving.
Do not put feet on the dashboard or the seat
area. Do not lean against the inside of the door
or outside the window while the vehicle is mov-
ing.
If the passenger's seat is warped significantly, a
message is displayed on the on-board computer:
f Correct the seat adjustment.
f Please observe the chapter WARNINGS ON
BOARD COMPUTER on Page 122.
Automatic deactivation of the front
passengers airbags
Danger!
The use of a child restraint system in the
front passengers seat can result in serious
personal injury or death to the child from an
airbag deployment.
f Please observe the chapter PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT
LIGHT UP on Page 49.
f Before transporting a child on the passengers
seat:
Please observe the chapter CHILD
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS on Page 51.
When an up to one-year old child is seated
in the child restraint system, the front airbag is
automatically deactivated on the passengers
side.
When an adult is seated in the front seat, the
front airbag remains active on the passengers
side.
A- PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
Note on operation
Although not desired, it can occur in the case of
heavier children that the passengers airbags re-
main active or, in the case of very light adults or
young persons, that the passengers airbag is
deactivated.
The condition of the passengers airbag system is
shown by the indicator lamp A.
If in doubt:
f Please observe the chapter PASSENGER AIR-
BAG OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT
UP on Page 49.
f Please observe the chapter KEY-OPERATED
AIRBAG DEACTIVATION DEVICE on Page 50.
f Please observe the chapter CHILD RES-
TRAINT SYSTEMS on Page 51.
f Please observe the chapter LATCH SYSTEM
CHILD SEAT BRACKET ON THE PASSENGERS
SEAT on Page 55.
Note
f After inserting the ignition key, the PASSEN-
GER AIRBAG OFF warning light lights up for a
few seconds as a bulb check.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up
The passenger's airbag is switched off.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
does not light up
The passenger's airbag is active and ready for
operation.
If the passenger's seat is not occupied, the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will
also not light up, even though the passenger's
airbag is switched off.
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death due
to the passenger airbag triggering uninten-
tionally.
When the ignition is on and the up to one-
year old child is seated in the child restraint
system on the passengers seat, the indicator
lamp PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFmust be on.
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFindicator
lamp does not light up, it could indicate a
fault in the system.
In this case:
f Child restraint systems facing forwards:
Install on the rear seats.
f Child restraint systems facing rearwards:
On vehicles with key-operated airbag deactiva-
tion device: Switch to position OFF.
f Child restraint systems facing rearwards:
On vehicles without key-operated airbag deac-
tivation device: Do not use a child restraint sys-
tem in the front passengers seat.
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest author-
Note
The key switch for switching off the passengers
airbag in combination with the LATCH attachment
bracket are not installed at the factory. They can
be retrofitted.
f Please see your authorized Porsche dealer.
Faults are indicated by a warning light in the instru-
ment panel and a message on the on-board com-
puter.
In the following cases you should immedi-
ately consult an authorized Porsche
dealer in order to assure the airbag sys-
tem is functioning properly:
If the warning light does not light up when the
ignition key is inserted or
If the warning light does not go out once the
engine is running or
If the warning light appears while driving.
Airbag maintenance
In order to ensure long-term functioning, the air-
bag system must be inspected by an authorized
Porsche dealer at the intervals recommended in
your Maintenance Booklet.
Important information
If you sell your Porsche, notify the purchaser that
the vehicle is equipped with airbags, and refer
them to the chapter, Airbag Systems, in the
Owner's Manual (safety and disposal rules).
Further information on the airbag system can be
found on stickers attached to the sun visors.
For special recommendations on the use of child
restraints:
Warning light and warning
message
Key-operated airbag deactivation device
If in doubt about the status of the airbag, you can
switch off the passenger's airbag on the key
switch.
f Switch off the passengers airbag on the key
switch using the vehicle key.
Switch position AUTO passengers airbag
system is active
Switch position OFF passengers airbag
system is switched off
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death for
passenger if passengers airbag remains
switched off after the child restraint system
is removed.
f Make sure that the key switch is switched to
AUTO once the child seat has been removed,
in order to provide protection to the adult
occupants.
Warning light PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
If the airbag on the passengers side is switched
off:
Warning light PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF is
continuously lit when the ignition key is
inserted.
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death from
the passengers airbag.
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFwarning
light Ais not lit when the ignition key is
inserted and the Airbag OFF switch is
switched to the OFF-Position, this could
indicate a fault in the system.
f Do not install a child restraint system on the
passengers seat.
f Have the fault remedied immediately.
Please see your authorized Porsche dealer.
Note
airbag in combination with the LATCH attachment
bracket are not installed at the factory. They can
be retrofitted.
Child Restraint Systems
Porsche recommends that all infants and children
be restrained in child restraint systems at all times
while the vehicle is in motion in accordance with
applicable laws.
Use only child restraint systems with the LATCH-
system recommended by Porsche. These sys-
tems have been tested and adjusted to the interior
of your Porsche and the appropriate child age
groups. Other systems have not been tested and
could entail an increased risk of injury or death.
You can obtain child seats that are LATCH compa-
tible at your authorized Porsche dealer.
f Always observe the separate installation in-
structions for your child seat.
The use of infant or child restraints is required by
law in all 50 states of the U.S. and all Canadian
provinces. The child restraint system should be
one that complies with U.S. Federal/ Canadian Mo-
tor Vehicle Safety Standards and should be se-
cured by a lap belt or lap belt portion of a lap-
shoulder belt or for child seats equipped with the
LATCH sytem (Lower Anchorage and Tether for
Children, also known as ISOFIX) to the LATCH an-
chorages.
A statement by the seat manufacturer of compli-
ance with this standard can be found on the in-
struction label on the restraint and in the instruc-
tion manual provided with the restraint.
Danger!
front passengers seat can result in serious
airbag deployment.
To reduce risk of injury from an inflating air-
bag in an accident, Porsche strongly recom-
mends:
Note
airbag and the LATCH attachment bracket are not
installed at the factory. They can be retrofitted.
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death to the
child.
f Follow all child restraint instructions and
warnings in this manual.
When using an infant or child restraint system,
be sure to follow all manufacturer's instruc-
tions on installation and use.
Infants and small children should never be held
on the lap, nor should they share a safety belt
with another occupant while the vehicle is in
motion.
Children too big for child restraint systems
should use regular safety belts. A shoulder belt
can be used providing it does not cross the
face or the neck of the child.
Choose a child restraint system according to
the age and size of the child.
Child restraint systems that are damaged or
have been heavily stressed in an accident must
be replaced immediately.
Do not affix things to child restraint systems or
cover it with other materials.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be glad to
advise you about the installation possibility for
a Porsche child restraint system which allows
a key-operated airbag deactivation of the pas-
sengers airbag.
The key-operated airbag deactivation device
installation requires special programming avail-
able only from your authorized Porsche dealer.
f Please observe the chapter KEY-OPERATED
AIRBAG DEACTIVATION DEVICE on Page 50.
Direction of installation for child restraint
systems
Children up to 9 months old
Children of this age must be transported in a
restraint system which is installed on the
passengers seat facing rearward.
f The passengers airbag must be deactivated.
Children aged between 9 months and
6 years
Children of this age are held in child restraint
systems facing forward.
Whenever possible, these child restraint systems
should be installed on the rear seats.
f The passengers airbag must be deactivated
when these systems are used on the front
passengers seat.
Children aged between 6 and 12 years
Children of this age are held in child restraint
systems facing forward.
Whenever possible, these child restraint systems
should be installed on the rear seats.
f The passengers airbag must be deactivated
when these systems are used on the
passengers seat.
The passengers airbag must be activated for
children weighing over 59 lbs. (27 kg).
Note
If a child seat with top tether is adapted for use on
the front seat, the rear right (passengers side) an-
chor point must be used for anchoring the top
tether.
It is then not permitted for a passenger to use the
rear right (passengers side) seat.
It is then not permitted to install a child restraint
system on the rear right (passengers side) seat.
f Please observe the chapter CHILD
RESTRAINT ANCHORAGES on Page 56.
Using child restraint systems in the front
passenger seat
Danger!
front passenger seat can result in serious
airbag deployment.
mends:
Child restraint system for up to one-year old
children
Make sure that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp lights up.
Adjust the passenger's seat as far away from
the airbag as possible.
Danger!
to the passengers airbag triggering uninten-
tionally.
When the ignition is on and the up to one-
year old child is seated in the child restraint
system on the passengers seat the indicator
lamp PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFmust be on.
lamp does not light up, it could indicate a
fault in the system.
In this case:
f On vehicles with key-operated airbag deactiva-
tion device: Switch to position OFF.
f On vehicles without key-operated airbag deac-
tivation device: Do not use a child restraint sys-
tem in the front passengers seat.
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest autho-
Child restraint system for children older than
one year
tem for the passenger's seat in accordance with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208.
Depending on the weight acting on the passen-
ger's seat, the passenger's airbag will automati-
cally be switched on or off.
Small adult passengers
Make sure that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indi-
cator lamp does not light up.
Danger!
to the passengers airbag not triggering.
When the ignition is on and the small adult
passenger is seated on the passengers seat,
the indicator lamp PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFFmust be off.
lamp lights up, it could indicate a fault in the
system.
In this case:
f Carry the passenger on the rear seat.
f Have the fault remedied at the nearest autho-
Automatic locking retractor
The safety belts for the front passenger and rear
seats are equipped with an automatic locking re-
tractor for securing the child restraint system.
When activated, this retractor allows you to se-
curely fasten the child restraint system in place so
that inadvertent movements will not occur.
Danger!
The use of a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat can result in serious
airbag deployment.
mends:
f Under all normal circumstances, forward fa-
cing child seats must be placed in the rear.
Before transporting a child on the passengers
seat:
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death to the
child, when excessive force is acting on the
passenger's seat due to the seat belt.
In such cases, the passenger's airbag can be
switched on unintentionally.
f After fastening the child restraint system, do
not adjust the seat.
f Check the condition of the passengers airbag
system shown by the indicator lamp A in the
central console.
Activating the automatic locking retractor
1. If a child restraint system must be fastened to
the passenger's seat, adjust the passenger's
seat as far away from the airbag as possible.
2. Fasten child seat.
3. Pull the safety belt retractor completely out. At
this point the locking mechanism is activated.
4. Insert the safety belt tongue into the buckle
and make certain that it is properly latched.
Make no more adjustments to the seat.
5. Allow the safety belt to retract until it is tight on
the child restraint system. You may further
tighten the belt by pulling on it to allow more of
it to retract.
Make sure that excessive seat belt forces do
not occur by moving the seat with the child
seat installed.
Releasing the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the safety belt latch.
2. Then make certain that the belt has fully re-
tracted. At this point the automatic locking fea-
ture will be disengaged.
Seek appropriate advice from your authorized
Porsche dealer about the possible installation
of a Porsche child restraint system.
LATCH System
Child seat bracket on the passengers
seat
airbag and the LATCH attachment bracket are not
installed at the factory. They can be retrofitted.
Porsche recommends the use of a Porsche Child
Seat with Lower Anchorage and Tether for Chil-
dren system (LATCH).
These systems have been tested and adjusted to
the interior of your Porsche and the appropriate
child age groups. Other systems have not been
tested and could entail an increased risk of injury.
You can obtain child seats that are LATCH compat-
ible at your authorized Porsche dealer.
f Always observe the separate installation in-
structions for your child seat.
f Please observe the chapter CHILD
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS on Page 51.
Installing a LATCH child seat system
1. Secure the child seat to retaining lugs A as
outlined in the instruction manual for the child
seat.
2. Pull the child seat to check that both fastening
points are engaged correctly.
Note
Make sure that the key switch is switched to AUTO
once the child seat has been removed, in order to
provide protection to the adult occupants.
Child Restraint Anchorages
(Coup only)
f Please observe the chapter AUTOMATIC LO-
CKING RETRACTOR on Page 54.
If your child restraint seat or seats require the use
of a tether strap, you will want to use the anchor
points provided behind the rear seat backrests un-
der the carpet.
To ensure proper installation, see your authorized
Porsche dealer.
Note
If a child seat with top tether is adapted for use on
the front seat, the rear right (passengers side) an-
chor point must be used for anchoring the top
tether. It is then not permitted for a passenger to
use the rear right (passengers side) seat.
Warning!
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by cor-
rectly fitted child restraints. Under no cir-
cumstances are they to be used for adults
safety belts or harnesses. Such use could re-
sult in serious personal injury or death.
f Do not misuse the child restraint anchorages.
They are not designed to withstand loads
imposed by adults.
f Only attach one child seat tether per ancho-
rage.
Rollover Protection System
The Rollover Protection System on the Cabriolet
consists of two supplemental safety bars that to-
gether with the front windshield frame help to cre-
ate occupant survival space in case of rollover. Be-
cause of the extreme and unpredictable forces
which can be encountered in a rollover, it is not
possible to guarantee that occupants will be pro-
tected from all contact with exterior objects or the
ground. However, the Rollover Protection System
is designed to maintain the occupant survival
space.
The Rollover Protection System is activated auto-
matically in the event of an accident or extreme
driving situation.
The protective devices are located behind each
rear seat and rapidly deploy within a fraction of a
second.
They can deploy under:
Extreme tilting of the vehicle.
Loss of ground contact (e.g. Going over the
crest of a hill at high speed).
Danger!
Risk of death or serious injury.
f Do not block area of supplemental safety bars
with objects.
In the event of a deployment event, such
objects could potentially prevent such deploy-
ment from occuring, or such objects could
impact the car occupants at high speed.
f Do not tamper with or work on wiring and or
components of Rollover Protection System.
f All work regarding this system must be carried
out by your authorized Porsche dealer.
f Check functions and periodic service intervals
according to maintenance schedule (see your
authorized Porsche dealer).
To avoid damage to the convertible top:
f If the supplemental safety bars are extended
for any reason, do not open or close converti-
ble top.
Faults in the Rollover Protection System are indi-
cated by the airbag warning light in the instrument
panel.
Extension of the supplemental safety bars is no
longer ensured.
f See your authorized Porsche dealer immedi-
ately and have the fault remedied.
Lowering the supplemental safety bars
after deployment
f Have this work performed by an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Warning light
Parking Aids
Parking assistant
When the driver backs up, the parking assistant
system indicates the distance between the car
and a large obstacle behind it, by means of signal
tones.
Warning!
Risk of serious personal injury or death.
Parking assistant cannot detect small ob-
jects such as children and pets.
Despite use of the parking assistant system,
the driver is still responsible for taking due
care and assessing obstacles when backing
up.
f Make sure that no persons, especially small
children, animals or obstacles are within the
maneuvring area.
The parking assistant system is activated auto-
matically when reverse gear is selected and the ig-
nition is on.
Note
Be aware that the parking assistant system is
not switched on if the car rolls backward without
reverse gear being engaged.
Ultrasound sensors
Sensors
Four ultrasound sensors in the rear bumper meas-
ure the distance to the closest obstacle.
Range middle sensors around 60 in./ 150 cm
Range outer sensors around 24 in./ 60 cm
Obstacles cannot be detected in the blind sen-
sor area (e.g. near the ground).
Note
The sensors must always be kept free of dust, ice
and snow in order to ensure that they are fully
functional.
Caution!
To avoid damaging the sensors:
f Maintain sufficient distance when cleaning with
steam-jet units.
Signal tones/ function
When reverse gear is selected, the parking assist-
ant confirms that it is switched on by issuing a
short signal tone.
A detected obstacle is signalled by an intermit-
tent tone. The intervals decrease as the obstacle
is approached.
A continuous tone sounds when the distance be-
comes less than one foot. This continuous tone
can stop if the obstacle is approached closer than
one foot.
The radio volume should not be so loud as to
drown out the signal tones.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The parking assistant system cannot detect:
sound-absorbing obstacles (e.g. powder
snow),
sound-reflecting obstacles (e.g. glass surfac-
es, flat painted surfaces)
and very thin obstacles.
Other ultrasound sources (e.g. pneumatic
brakes of other vehicles, jackhammers) can in-
terfere with detection of obstacles.
Fault indication
The parking assistant system indicates a fault in
two ways:
After reverse gear has been selected, the
short signal tone is followed by a continuous
tone of the same pitch:
This indicates that sensors are soiled or cov-
ered with ice.
After reverse gear has been selected, the
short signal tone is followed by a continuous
tone with a much lower pitch:
This indicates a general system fault. Please
have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
A- Control switch for door mirror adjustment
Swivelling down mirror glass as a parking
aid
on Page 36.
When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass on the passengers side swivels down
slightly to show the curb area.
Preconditions
Vehicle must be equipped with seat memory.
Set the control switch A to passengers side.
Reverse gear must be engaged.
Returning mirror glass to its original position
f Drive forwards with a speed of over 4 mph
(6 km/ h) or
f Set the control switch A to drivers side.
Four-Wheel Drive
With the four-wheel drive of the 911 Carrera 4 and
911 Carrera 4S, the engine power is variably dis-
tributed to the front and rear wheels.
Power distribution and wheel speed compensation
between the front and rear axles is realised with a
viscous multiple-disc clutch.
Distribution of the engine power is dependent
upon the wheel speed difference between the two
axles.
The viscous multiple-disc clutch always delivers
sufficient drive power to the front wheels (approx.
5%to 40%) to ensure optimum traction even on a
poor road surface.
In combination with the Porsche Stability Manage-
ment (PSM), four-wheel drive improves handling
and increases driving stability.
Warning!
The increased control that is provided should
not induce you to take greater risks with your
safety. The limits dictated by the laws of phy-
sics cannot be overcome, even with four-
wheel drive.
The risk of accidents due to inappropriate
speed cannot be reduced, even by four-
wheel drive.
The driver bears the responsibility for all dri-
ving maneuvers.
f Adapt your driving style to the prevailing road
and weather conditions.
f Obey all traffic laws.
Dynamometer testing procedure
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces con-
duct emissions inspection/ maintenance testing in-
volving the use of two-wheel dynamometer.
A two-wheeled dynamometer is a treadmill type
device upon which a single axle of the car, the dri-
ving axle of the vehicle, rotates to simulate vehicle
operation on the road while the vehicle remains
stationary.
Your 911 Carrera 4 or 911 Carrera 4S has a full-
time four-wheel drive system which cannot be
disabled. Severe damage to the powertrain can
result if tested on a two-wheel dynamometer.
Warning!
To avoid severe powertrain damage and a
possible unexpected movement of the vehic-
le.
f Your 911 Carrera 4 or 911 Carrera 4S vehicle
must never be tested on a two-wheel dynamo-
meter.
f Advise the emission station of this warning be-
fore testing the vehicle.
Power measurement
Power measurements on dynamometers are not
approved by Porsche.
Brake tests
Brake tests must be performed only on plate-type
test stands or roller test stands.
The following limit values must not be exceeded
on roller test stands:
Testing speed 5 mph (8 km/ h)
Test duration 20 seconds
Handbrake tests
Handbrake tests on the roller test stand must be
performed only with the ignition switched off.
Balancing wheels on the vehicle
During finish balancing of the wheels, the vehicle
must be hoisted and all the wheels able to rotate
freely.
Towing
f Please observe the chapter TOWING on
Page 281.
Retractable Rear Spoiler
The rear spoiler improves driving stability,
especially at higher speeds.
Warning!
Risk of accident. If the rear spoiler cannot be
extended, driving stability will be adversely
affected by increased rear axle lift, which
could lead to loss of control.
f Adapt your driving style and speed to the
changed driving behaviour.
f Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Risk of injury during manual retraction or
extension of the rear spoiler with the vehicle
stationary.
f Make sure that no persons or objects are
within the range of movement of the rear
spoiler.
Risk of damage from pushing the vehicle by
the spoiler.
f Do not push the vehicle at the spoiler.
Automatic mode
The limits for automatic extension and retraction
of the spoiler depend on various circumstances
(e.g. driving speed, engine compartment temper-
ature).
Engine compartment temperature
under 122F/ 55C
Spoiler extends at 75 mph/ 120 km/ h and
retracts at 37 mph/ 60 km/ h.
Engine compartment temperature
over 140F/ 60C
Spoiler extends at 50 mph/ 80 km/ h and retracts
at 19 mph/ 30 km/ h.
If automatic control fails, a warning message is
displayed by the on-board computer.
When the ignition is on, the rear spoiler can be
extended and retracted manually using the button
in the center console.
Extending
f Press button briefly.
The spoiler extends to its final position.
Retracting a manually extended rear spoiler
f at speeds between 0 and 20 mph
(0 and 30 km/ h)
Press and hold button until the rear spoiler has
reached its final position.
The rear spoiler changes to automatic mode.
f at speeds between 20 and 60 mph
(30 and 100 km/ h)
Press button briefly.
The rear spoiler retracts, the light-emitting
diode in the button goes out.
f at speeds over 60 mph (100 km/ h)
Press button briefly.
The rear spoiler remains extended, the light-
emitting diode in the button goes out.
Manual control
Clutch Pedal
The clutch pedal must be depressed fully
before the starter will engage.
Warning!
f Always check the movement of the clutch ped-
al before driving and make sure that it is not
obstructed by a floor mat or any other object.
f Secure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding
into positions that could interfere with the safe
operation of your vehicle.
Your Porsche dealer will be glad to offer you
nonskid floor mats of the correct size.
To avoid damage to the clutch and transmis-
sion:
f Always depress the clutch pedal fully when
changing gears.
f Do not hold the car on a steep grade with the
clutch pedal partially depressed.
Should the free travel of the clutch pedal suddenly
become larger, it could mean a malfunction of the
clutch.
f See your Porsche dealer for correction.
Parking Brake
Parking brake force is mechanically transferred to
the rear wheels by means of cables.
f Use the parking brake only after the vehicle
has come to a full stop.
Setting the parking brake
f Pull the lever all the way up (arrow).
With the ignition on, the parking brake warning
lights in the instrument panel and on-board
computer will come on if the lever is even
slightly raised. A firm pull upward is required to
properly engage the parking brake.
If the brake is not fully set, the vehicle may roll
without control.
f Move the selector lever to P (Tiptronic) or
move the gearshift lever to reverse or first
gear (Manual transmission).
f Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully set and the vehicle is not
moving at all.
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death. A
partially engaged parking brake may allow
the vehicle to roll, causing serious personal
injury or death to any person in its path.
f Engage the parking brake fully.
Releasing the parking brake
f Pull the lever slightly up as you depress the re-
lease button, and then push the lever all the
way down.
The warning lights in the instrument panel and on-
board computer will go out after the parking brake
is fully released.
The warning lights are not an indicator that the
parking brake is fully set; it is only intended to be
a warning to release the parking brake before
driving the car.
Caution!
A partially engaged brake will overheat the
rear brakes, reduce their effectiveness and
cause excessive wear.
f Release the parking brake fully.
f When parking your car, always set the parking
brake by pulling all the way up on the lever.
f Move the selector lever to P (Tiptronic) or
move the gearshift lever to reverse or first
gear (Manual transmission).
f On hills also turn the front wheels towards the
curb.
Brakes
f Make it a habit to check the operation of your
brakes before driving.
Keep in mind that the braking distance increases
very rapidly as the speed increases. At 60 mph or
100 km/ h, for example, it is not twice but four
times longer than 30 mph or 50 km/ h. Tire trac-
tion is also less effective when the roads are wet
or slippery.
f Therefore, always maintain a safe distance
from the car in front of you.
Vehicles without Porsche Ceramic Compos-
ite Brake (PCCB)
Even though the brake discs consist of alloyed
grey cast iron, they will unavoidably start to cor-
rode if your car is parked for an extended period.
The brakes will tend to rub as a result.
The nature, extent and effects of corrosion de-
pend on the amount of time the vehicle was
parked, whether granular or liquid road salt was
spread and whether grease-dissolving agents
were used in car washes.
If the braking comfort is noticeably impaired, we
recommend having the brake system checked by
experts at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Brake systemfunction
Your Porsche is equipped with a power assisted
hydraulic dual circuit brake system with disc
brakes at the front and rear.
Both circuits function independently. One brake
circuit operates the front and the other operates
the rear.
If one brake circuit has failed, the other will still op-
erate. However, you will notice an increased pedal
travel when you apply the brakes.
Failure of one brake circuit will cause the stopping
distance to increase.
Warning!
In the unlikely event of hydraulic failure of
one brake circuit:
f Push the brake pedal down firmly and hold it in
that position.
A mechanical linkage activates the second cir-
cuit, and you will be able to bring the vehicle to
a stop.
f After bringing your vehicle to a complete stop,
avoid driving the vehicle and instead have it
towed to the nearest authorized Porsche deal-
er for repair.
Parking brake warning light USA
Parking brake warning light
Canada
If the warning lights in the instrument panel and on-
board computer go on while driving, the brake flu-
id level may be too low, or (if the brake pedal travel
has increased) one of the two brake circuits may
have failed.
A greater braking pressure will be required, stop-
ping distances will be longer and the braking be-
havior will change, particularly in curves.
With correctly adjusted brakes, and a correctly
working brake system, the pedal travel to the
point of brake actuation should be 1-3/ 16 in. to
1-9/ 16 in. or 30 to 40 mm.
Whenever the brake pedal travel exceeds this dis-
tance, have the brake system checked.
Brake pedal
Warning!
Any obstruction of the brake pedal could
increase the stopping distance.
f Always check the movement of the brake pedal
before driving and make sure that it is not ob-
structed by a floor mat or any other object.
f Secure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding
operation of your vehicle.
nonskid floor mats of the correct size.
Note
In case one of the two brake circuits fails, in-
creased pedal travel is required to bring your
vehicle to a full stop.
Warning!
To avoid overheating and premature wear of
the brakes:
f Before descending a steep grade, reduce
speed and shift the transmission into a lower
gear or driving position to control speed.
f Do not ride the brakes by resting your foot on
the pedal when not intending to apply brake
pressure.
f Do not hold the pedal down too long or too
often.
This could cause the brakes to get hot and not
function properly.
Brake warning light USA
Brake warning light Canada
Brake booster
The brake booster assists braking only when
the engine is running.
When the car is moving while the engine is not run-
ning, or if the brake booster is defective, more
pressure on the brake pedal is required to bring
the car to a stop.
If this happens, ABS and PSM will also not oper-
ate.
Moisture or road salt on brakes affects braking.
When the vehicle is driven on salted roads for ex-
tended periods, the brakes should be washed
down thoroughly about every 2 weeks. An auto-
matic carwash facility cannot do this job properly.
Brakes will dry after a few cautious brake applica-
tions.
Warning!
Driving through water may reduce the trac-
tion.
Moisture on brakes from road water, car
wash, or coating of road salt may affect
braking efficiency.
f Cautiously apply brakes to test brakes after
being exposed.
Brake wear
Your car has excellent brakes, but they are still
subject to wear. The rate at which they wear de-
pends on how the brakes are used.
f Have the brake system inspected at the
intervals recommended in your Maintenance
Booklet.
board computer stay on when the engine is run-
ning or come on while driving, the brake pads are
worn, excessively.
f Do not continue to operate the vehicle.
Have your authorized Porsche dealer inspect
or replace the brake pads.
Brake pads
Wear on the brake pads and brake discs depends
to a great extent on the driving style and the con-
ditions of use and therefore cannot be expressed
in actual miles on the road.
The high-performance brake system is designed
for optimal braking effect at all speeds and tem-
peratures.
Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient
conditions (such as temperature and humidity)
therefore might cause brake noises.
Newbrake pads or linings
New brake pads and brake discs have to be bro-
ken in, and therefore only attain optimal friction
when the car has covered several hundred miles
or km.
The slightly reduced braking ability must be com-
pensated for by pressing the brake pedal harder.
This also applies whenever the brake pads and
brake discs are replaced.
Warning light USA
Warning light Canada
ABS Brake System
(Antilock Brake System)
The ABS system represents a major contribution
to the enhancement of active safety in your vehi-
cle. This system prevents the wheels from locking
in a panic stop on almost all road surfaces.
With the ABS system in your vehicle, the
following areas are enhanced:
Steering, vehicle remains steerable under all
braking forces when ABS is engaged.
Good directional control, no swerving caused
by locking of wheels under braking conditions.
Shorter stopping distance, stopping distances
are usually reduced because controlled braking is
maximized.
Prevention of wheel lock up, no brake- induced
sliding and thus no localized tire wear from emer-
gency braking.
The crucial advantage of the ABS system over a
conventional brake system is in the area of main-
taining directional control and maneuverability of
the car in emergency situations during normal driv-
ing, including panic braking in turns.
Warning!
safety. The limits dictated by the laws of
physics cannot be overcome, even with ABS.
speed cannot be reduced, even by the ABS.
The driver bears the responsibility for all
driving maneuvers.
Other vehicles not equipped with the ABS
system may not be able to maintain control,
especially on wet or poor road surfaces and
thus may be more likely to impact you from
behind.
f To minimize that risk, use your ABS system to
increase your ability to maneuver to avoid dan-
gerous situations and not merely to try to stop
in the shortest distance possible.
Operation of the ABS system
A wheel speed sensor is mounted to each of the
four wheels. If wheel lock-up of either of the front
wheels or the rear wheels is sensed during brak-
ing, the brake pressure is adjusted automatically
until the wheel no longer slips. The brake pressure
is regulated for each front wheel individually and
for both of the rear wheels together.
On a road surface which is slippery on only one
side, the rear wheel which is braking on the slip-
pery surface determines the brake pressure which
will be applied equally to both rear wheels. This en-
sures that directional stability is maintained. How-
ever, if braking forces approach the wheel lock-up
point for all wheels (panic braking) the ABS system
will intervene to provide a rapid rythmic braking.
The proper operation of ABS is perceived by the
driver as a pulsating brake pedal in conjunction
with audible noise and perhaps some vibration.
f If you experience these sensations while driv-
ing or a road surface with questionable trac-
tion, reduce vehicle speed appropriate for the
prevailing road conditions.
The functional readiness of all the main electrical
components of the ABS is checked by an
electronic monitoring system both before and
while you drive.
When the ignition is switched on the ABS warning
light will light up while the system is electronically
interrogated and goes out when the engine is
started if the check is not yet complete.
If the ABS warning lamp fails to go out, this indi-
cates that ABS has been deactivated due to a
fault. If the warning lights in the instrument panel
and on-board computer light up while you are driv-
ing, this indicates that a fault has occurred. In both
cases, normal braking, as in vehicles without ABS,
is still retained.
The ABS system should, however, be examined at
an authorized Porsche dealer immediately to pre-
vent the occurrence of further faults.
f If the ABS system becomes inoperative, take
your vehicle to your authorized Porsche dealer
immediately.
Warning!
The control unit of the ABS brake system is
set for standard tire size. If non-standard
tires are installed, the control unit may mis-
interpret the speed of the vehicle, because of
the variant data it receives from the sensors
on the axles.
f Use only tire makes and types tested by
Porsche.
Warning light USA
Sport Mode
A sportier car set-up is obtained when Sport mode
is switched on. Interventions by the Porsche
control systems are intentionally shifted towards
greater agility and driving performance.
PASM (Porsche Active Suspension Manage-
ment) is automatically changed to Sport mode,
resulting in a stiffer suspension setup.
The Tiptronic S switches to a sporty gear-
changing map and shortens the gear shifting
periods. Gear changes take place faster.
PSM (Porsche Stability Management) control is
sporty. PSM interventions take place later than
in Normal mode. The driver can maneuver the
vehicle with greater agility at its performance
limits, without having to dispense with the
assistance of PSM in emergency situations.
The electronic accelerator pedal reacts
sooner, and the engine is more responsive to
throttle inputs. When Sport mode is switched
on, this function is activated only after the
driver has floored the accelerator pedal or
released it briefly.
The rpm limiter characteristic is harder, i.e.
the engine is immediately throttled when the
performance limits are reached (only in manual
selection mode for vehicles with Tiptronic S).
f Please observe the appropriate chapters of
this Manual.
Switching Sport mode on and off
f Press SPORT button in the center console.
When Sport mode is switched on, the light-
emitting diode in the SPORT button is lit.
When Sport mode is switched on, the logo SPORT
appears next to the digital speedometer.
Switching Sport mode on and off simultaneously
activates and deactivates the Sport mode of the
PASM.
If the Sport mode of the PASM was activated with
the PASM button, it will remain on.
After the ignition is switched off, Sport mode is
automatically reset to Normal mode.
Porsche Stability Management
(PSM)
PSM is an active control system for stabilization of
the vehicle during extreme driving manoeuvres.
The most recent version of PSM (only on vehicles
with four-wheel drive) improves the brake system
functionality.
Warning!
safety. The limits dictated by the laws of
physics cannot be overcome, even with PSM.
speed cannot be reduced, even by PSM.
The driver bears the responsibility for all
driving maneuvers.
Advantages of PSM
Superior traction and lane-holding ability in all
driving situations even on road surfaces with
varying friction.
PSM actively stabilizes the vehicle during dy-
namic driving maneuvers (e.g. rapid steering
movements, during lane changes or on alter-
nating curves).
Improved braking stability in curves and on dif-
ferent or varying road surfaces.
It improves the braking functions and shortens
the stopping distance if emergency braking is
needed (only vehicles with four-wheel drive).
Readiness for operation
PSM is switched on automatically every time you
start the engine.
Function
Sensors at the wheels, brakes, steering system
and engine continuously measure:
Speed
Steering angle
Lateral acceleration
Rate of turn about the vertical axis
Brake pressure
PSM uses these values to determine the direction
of travel desired by the driver.
PSM intervenes and corrects the course if the
actual direction of motion deviates from the
desired course (steering-wheel position):
It brakes individual wheels as needed. In addition,
the engine power may be manipulated in order to
stabilize the vehicle.
The events below inform the driver of PSM control
operations and warn him to adapt his driving style
to the road conditions:
The multi-functional information light on the
instrument panel lights up.
Hydraulic noises can be heard.
The vehicle decelerates and steering-wheel
forces are altered as the PSM controls the
brakes.
Reduced engine power.
The brake pedal pulsates and its position is
changed during braking.
In order to achieve full vehicle deceleration,
foot pressure must be increased after begin-
ning of the brake pedal pulsing.
Examples of PSM control operations
If the front wheels of the vehicle drift on a
bend, the rear wheel on the inside of the bend
is braked and the engine power is reduced if
necessary.
If the rear of the vehicle swings out on a bend,
the front wheel on the outside of the bend is
braked.
Additional functions for vehicles with
four-wheel drive
Pre-filling the brake system:
If you suddenly and quickly take your foot off
the accelerator pedal, the brake system gets
prepared for possible emergency braking. The
brake system is pre-filled which lightly presses
the brake pads on the brake discs.
Brake boost:
If emergency braking does not have sufficient
pedal pressure, the brake boost produces
the brake pressure necessary for maximum decel-
eration on all 4 wheels.
The PSM should always be switched on
during normaldriving.
However, it may be advantageous to switch off
PSM temporarily in exceptional situations, for
example:
On a loose surface or in deep snow,
When rocking the vehicle free and
When using snow chains.
Switching off PSM
f Press PSM OFF button.
PSM is switched off after a short delay.
The light-emitting diode in the button is illumi-
nated.
When the PSM is switched off, the multifunc-
tional PSM light on the instrument panel is lit
and a message is shown by the on-board
computer. An acoustic signal also sounds.
Vehicles with four-wheel drive
When PSM is switched off, the additional braking
functions are deactivated. The automatic reactiva-
tion in emergency situations is coupled to the PSM
control in emergency situations.
The following functions stabilize the vehicle in
emergency situations, even with PSM switched
off:
When PSM is off, the vehicle is stabilized as
soon as one of the two front wheels enters the
ABS control range.
When PSM is off and Sport mode is on, the
vehicle is stabilized as soon as both front
wheels enter the ABS control range.
One-sided spinning of the wheels is prevented,
even with PSM switched off.
Switching PSM back on
f Press PSM OFF button.
PSM is switched on after a short delay.
The light-emitting diode in the button and the
multifunctional PSM light go out.
The on-board computer shows a message.
Sport mode
A sportier car set-up is obtained when Sport mode
is switched on. PSM interventions are later than in
Normal mode; the vehicle can be manoeuvred
with greater agility at its performance limits,
without the need to dispense with the assistance
of PSM in emergency situations. This helps to
achieve optimal lap times, particularly on race
circuits and a dry road surface.
The multifunctional light on the instrument
panel lights up for a lamp check when the
ignition is switched on.
The light indicates a control operation by
flashing, including when PSM is switched off
(brake control in the event of one-sided wheel
spin).
In conjunction with a message on the on-board
computer, the light indicates that PSM is
switched off.
An acoustic signal also sounds.
Faults are displayed by the light in conjunction
with a message on the on-board computer.
PSM is out of order.
f Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
f Please observe the chapter PUTTING
VEHICLE INTO OPERATION on Page 261.
Towing
f Please observe the chapter VEHICLE
TOWING on Page 281.
Checks on test stands
Brake tests
Brake tests must be performed only on plate-type
test stands or roller test stands.
The following limit values must not be exceeded
on roller test stands:
Testing speed 5 mph (8 km/ h)
Test duration 20 seconds
Handbrake tests
Handbrake tests on the roller test stand must be
performed only with the ignition switched off.
Multifunctional PSM light
PASM makes two running-gear setups available to
the driver: Normal and Sport.
The selection is made via a button on the center
console.
In Normal mode the running gear is in a sporty and
comfortable setup.
Sport mode offers a markedly sporty shock
absorber tuning (e.g. for driving on the race
circuit).
The variable suspension system selects the appro-
priate damping level for each wheel according to
the situation and conditions of driving.
Example:
If the vehicle is driven in a markedly sporty manner
in Normal mode, PASM automatically adapts the
shock-absorber behavior to the driving situation in
this case as well.
Switching on PASM Sport mode
f Press PASM button in the center console.
When PASM Sport mode is switched on, the
light-emitting diode in the button is illuminated
and a message is shown by the on-board
computer.
Switching off PASM Sport mode
f Press PASM button in the center console.
The light-emitting diode in the button goes out
and the on-board computer displays a
message.
After the ignition is switched off, PASM is automat-
ically reset to Normal mode.
Porsche Active Suspension
Management (PASM)
A, C - Switch for reading light on driver/ passenger side
B- Switch for interior light and footwell lights
D- Orientation light
Interior Lights
Page 255.
For vehicles with automatic anti-dazzle
mirrors
f Switch off the automatic anti-dazzle operation
of the mirrors before you switch on the interior
light.
Otherwise the mirrors may accidentally swivel
into the anti-dazzle position.
Interior lights, reading lights
Switching off
f Press left half of switch.
Switching to continuous illumination
f Press right half of switch.
Switching on and off automatically
f Move switch to center position.
The interior and footwell lights are switched
on when a door is unlocked or opened or when
the ignition key is withdrawn from the ignition
lock.
The lights are switched off with a delay of
approx. 2 minutes after the doors are closed.
The light goes out immediately as soon as the
ignition is switched on or the vehicle is locked.
Orientation light
A light-emitting diode at the bottom of the interior
mirror improves orientation in the passenger com-
partment when it is dark.
Note on operation
brightness of the orientation light can be changed
in PCM.
f Please observe the chapter Individual
Memory in the separate PCM operating
instructions.
Operation, Instruments
1.Ignition lock/ steering lock
2.Turn signals/ high beam/ headlight flasher stalk
3.Hands-free microphone for telephone
4.Horn
5.Wiper/ washer stalk, rear window wiper
6.Button for seat heating, left
7.Interior temperature sensor/ GPS antenna
8.Stopwatch
9.Emergency flasher switch
10.Central locking button, readiness display for
alarm system
11.Porsche Communication Management (PCM)
12.Button for seat heating, right
13.Cupholder
14.Light switch
15.Operating lever for on-board computer
16.Locking lever for steering-wheel adjustment
17.Operating lever for automatic speed control
18.Operating panel for air conditioning
19 Buttons for rear spoiler,
(PASM),
Sport mode, Porsche Stability Management
(PSM)
Ignition/Starter Switch with anti-
theft Steering Lock
The ignition lock has a total of four ignition lock po-
sitions.
The ignition key rebounds to the initial position
from every ignition lock position.
For your safety, fasten safety belts.
f Please observe the chapter IMMOBILIZER on
Page 19.
f Please observe the chapter KEY WITH RADIO
REMOTE CONTROL on Page 20.
Before starting the engine
f Apply the footbrake.
f Manual transmission:
Move the gearshift lever into neutral.
f Tiptronic:
Move the selector lever to P or N.
Switch position 0
Initial position
The ignition key cannot be withdrawn when the
ignition is switched on or when the engine has
been started.
To withdraw the ignition key:
f Stop the vehicle.
f On vehicles with Tiptronic S:
Move selector lever to position P.
f Switch ignition off.
Switch position 1
Ignition on
f Turn ignition key to position 1.
Ignition is switched on.
Note on operation
All electrical equipment can be switched on.
Switch position 2
Start engine
f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 2.
f Please observe the chapter STARTING PRO-
CEDURES on Page 82.
Switch position 3
Ignition off
Locking the steering column
Automatic locking
The steering column is automatically locked when
the ignition key is withdrawn from the ignition lock.
Warning!
The steering wheel will lock and will cause
loss of steering.
f Never remove key from the ignition lock or turn
the key off while the vehicle is moving.
f Always withdrawthe ignition key when leav-
ing the vehicle.
Automatic unlocking
The steering column is automatically unlocked
when the ignition key is inserted into the ignition
lock.
Note
Please observe the chapter BATTERY on
Page 258.
Gong
If you leave the key in the ignition/ steering lock, a
gong will sound when the drivers door is opened.
This is a reminder to remove the key.
Starting Procedures
f Please observe the chapter IMMOBILIZER on
Page 19.
f Please observe the chapter EMISSION CONT-
ROL SYSTEM on Page 211.
Warning!
Serious injury may result if you are involved
in a collision without having fastened the
safety belts.
f Fasten safety belts before driving away.
Before starting the engine
f Apply the footbrake.
f Manual transmission:
Move the gearshift lever into neutral.
f Tiptronic:
Move the selector lever to P or N.
Temperature sensors on the engine automatically
provide the correct fuel/ air mixture required for
starting.
Therefore, it is not necessary to depress the
accelerator pedal while starting a cold or a
warm engine.
Starting the engine
f As soon as the engine starts, release the igni-
tion key.
The first operation of the starter is ended automat-
ically when the engine starts.
If the engine does not start, subsequent starter
operations will not be ended automatically.
If the engine fails to start after 10 or 15 seconds
of cranking:
f Wait about 10 seconds before engaging the
starter again.
f When starting the engine, be ready to drive
immediately.
Drive vehicle at moderate speeds and avoid
engine speeds above 4,200 rpm during the
first 5 minutes.
f Do not let the engine idle to warm up.
Danger!
Engine exhaust fumes have many compo-
nents which you can smell. They also contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is a colorless
and odorless gas.
Carbon monoxide can cause unconscious-
ness and even death if inhaled.
f Never start or let the engine run in an en-
closed, unventilated area.
It is not recommended to sit in your car for pro-
longed periods with the engine on and the car
not moving.
An unattended vehicle with a running engine
is potentially hazardous.
If warning lights should come on to indicate
improper operation, they would go unno-
ticed.
f Never leave the engine idling unattended.
Danger of fire.
f Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas
where the hot exhaust system may come in
contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or oth-
er flammable material.
f If your car catches on fire for any reason, call
the fire department.
Do not endanger your life by attempting to put
out the fire.
Stopping Engine
f Turn key back to position 3.
f Do not stop engine immediately after hard or
extended driving.
Keep engine running at increased idle for
about two minutes to prevent excessive heat
build-up before turning off engine.
f Make sure that when you leave the car, even
briefly, you have withdrawn the ignition key.
f Engage the steering lock by moving the steer-
ing wheel to the left or right.
Turn the steering wheel to the locking position
before you switch off the engine so that you
dont have to exert yourself when locking or
unlocking the steering.
Warning!
Danger of injury. Hot engine compartment
components can burn skin on contact.
f Before working on any part in the engine com-
partment, turn the engine off and let it cool
down sufficiently.
Engine-compartment blower,
radiator fan
The radiator and radiator fans are in the front of
the car.
The engine-compartment blower is mounted on
the engine compartment lid.
Warning!
Risk of injury.
After the engine is switched off, the engine-
compartment temperature is monitored for
approx. 30 minutes.
During this period, and depending on tem-
perature, the engine-compartment blower
may continue to run or start to run.
f Carry out work in these areas only with the en-
gine off, the ignition off, and exercise extreme
caution.
Risk of injury. The radiator fans in the front
end of the car may be operating or
unexpectedly start operating when the
engine is switched on.
gine switched off.
Automatic garage door
The ignition system in your Porsche may interfere
with your electronically operated garage door.
f To check this, drive your Porsche close to the
garage door. Make sure not to interfere with
the operating range of the door.
f Run the engine at different speeds.
If the garage door opens or closes without you op-
erating the garage door unit in your car, contact
the dealer who installed the automatic garage
door to have the frequency and/ or coding of the
garage door signal changed or modified.
Instrument Panel USA Models
Also refer to the corresponding chapters in
the Owners Manual.
1.Engine oil temperature gauge
2.Speedometer with analogue display
3.Tire pressure warning light
4.Turn signal indicator light, left
5.Tachometer
6.High beam indicator light
7.Turn signal indicator light, right
8.ABS warning light
9.Cooling system
Temperature gauge, warning light
10.Fuel
Level gauge, warning light
11.Engine oil pressure gauge
12.Adjustment button for instrument illumination
and trip counter
13.Odometer and daily trip mileage display
14.Automatic speed control indicator light
15.Light sensor for instrument illumination
16.Airbag warning light
17.Emission control warning light
(Check Engine)
18.Central warning light
19.On-board computer display
20.Porsche Stability Management
21.Brake warning light
22.Safety belt warning light
23.Tiptronic indicator
24.Clock and outside temperature display
25 Adjustment button for clock
When the ignition is switched on, the warning
lights light up for a lamp check.
Note
Warnings that have been given are stored in the
appropriate control unit memory and can be read
out at an authorized Porsche dealer.
This information can help to warn you about situa-
tions which may be hazardous to you or your car.
Instrument Panel Canada Models
Also refer to the corresponding chapters in
the Owners Manual.
1.Engine oil temperature gauge
2.Speedometer with analogue display
3.Tire pressure warning light
4.Turn signal indicator light, left
5.Tachometer
6.High beam indicator light
7.Turn signal indicator light, right
8.ABS warning light
9.Cooling system
Temperature gauge, warning light
10.Fuel
Level gauge, warning light
11.Engine oil pressure gauge
12.Adjustment button for instrument illumination
and trip counter
13.Odometer and daily trip mileage display
14.Automatic speed control indicator light
15.Light sensor for instrument illumination
16.Airbag warning light
17.Emission control warning light
(Check Engine)
18.Central warning light
19.On-board computer display
20.Porsche Stability Management
21.Brake warning light
22.Safety belt warning light
23.Tiptronic indicator
24.Clock and outside temperature display
25 Adjustment button for clock
When the ignition is switched on, the warning
lights light up for a lamp check.
Note
Warnings that have been given are stored in the
appropriate control unit memory and can be read
out at an authorized Porsche dealer.
This information can help to warn you about situa-
tions which may be hazardous to you or your car.
The engine oil temperature is indicated in the left
instrument.
A- Adjustment button for instrument illumination and
trip counter
Indicates automatic speed control readiness.
Instrument Illumination
The illumination is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness by the light sensor in the
tachometer.
In addition, when the car lights are switched on,
the instrument and switch symbol brightness can
be manually adjusted.
Warning!
Risk of an accident, personal injury and loss
of control.
f Do not reach through the steering-wheel
spokes while driving.
Note
When the car lights are switched on, the instru-
ment lighting for light dials switches on and off
automatically depending on the ambient bright-
ness.
Engine oil temperature
Automatic Speed Control
Indicator light
Dimming instrument illumination
f Turn adjustment button A in the appropriate di-
rection and hold it until the desired brightness
has been reached.
The chosen level of brightness is indicated by
a bar display in the display field of the on-board
computer.
Trip Odometer
Warning!
Risk of an accident, personal injury and loss
of control.
Resetting to zero
f Press adjustment button A for approximately
one second or
f Reset the distance in the SET menu of the on-
board computer.
Please observe the chapter SET BASIC SET-
TING ON ON-BOARD COMPUTER on
Page 120.
After exceeding 6,213 miles or 9,999 kilometers,
the counter returns to 0.
Speedometer
The digital speedometer is integrated in the on-
board computer.
The indication changes from mph to km/ h when
the units are changed from miles to kilometers.
Changing over between
Miles / Kilometers
The units of the distance and speed displays can
be changed in the SET menu of the on-board
computer.
f Please observe the chapter SET BASIC SET-
TING ON ON-BOARD COMPUTER on
Page 120.
Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed in revolu-
tions per minute (rpm).
The beginning of the red marks at the right end of
the scale indicates the maximum permissible en-
gine rpm.
A speed limiter prevents the engine from being
overrevved during acceleration. Before reaching
this area, the next higher gear should be select-
ed.
Shift to the next lower gear when the engine rpm
drops below 1,500 rpm.
Caution!
To avoid severe engine damage.
f Always observe the engine rpm before down-
shifting to a lower gear, so you do not exceed
the maximum engine rpm.
Flashes in synchronism with the turn signals.
Left arrow left turn signals
Right arrow right turn signals
f If the frequency of the display becomes notice-
ably faster, check the operation of the turn sig-
nals.
Indicator light
Lights when high beam or headlight flasher is
switched on.
The indicator light goes out when the high beams
are switched off.
Turn Signal Indicator Light
High Beam
Temperature gauge (ignition on)
USA: Display in F
Canada: Display in C
Pointer to the left engine cold
f Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine
loading.
Pointer in the middle normal operating tem-
perature
The pointer may move up to the red area when en-
gine is heavily loaded and outside temperature is
high, but should return to normal when engine
load is reduced.
Warning light A
If the coolant temperature is too high, the warn-
ing light comes on.
Additionally, a warning is displayed in the on-board
computer.
f Pull off the road, turn off the engine and allow
to cool.
f Check radiator and air passages in front end of
car for obstructions.
f Check coolant level.
If necessary, add coolant and have fault reme-
died at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Please observe the chapter COOLANT LEVEL
on Page 199.
Note
To prevent excessive temperatures, the cooling-
air passages must not be restricted by coverings
(e.g. films, stone guards).
If the coolant level is too low, the warning light
flashes.
computer.
f Switch engine off and allow to cool.
f Add coolant.
f Have the cause of the fault remedied at an au-
thorized Porsche dealer.
Please observe the chapter COOLANT LEVEL
on Page 199.
Caution!
Risk of engine damage.
f If the warning lights come on even though cool-
ant level is correct, do not continue driving.
f Have the fault remedied at the nearest
Engine compartment blower fan
In addition, this warning light flashes to indicate a
fault in the engine compartment blower fan.
f Have the cause of the fault remedied at an
Cooling System
Tiptronic
Indicator for selector lever position and
engaged gear
When the engine is running, the selector lever
position and engaged gear are indicated.
If the selector lever is between two positions:
The corresponding selector lever position in
the instrument cluster flashes and
The warning Selector lever not engaged
appears on the display of the on-board
computer.
f Engage the selector lever correctly.
If there is a fault in the transmission:
The 4th gear display flashes.
The warning Tiptronic emergency run
appears on the on-board computer.
f Please observe the chapter REDUCED
DRIVING PROGRAM on Page 170.
f Have the fault repaired immediately at an
f Please observe the chapter TIPTRONIC S on
Page 165.
Level gauge
When the ignition is on the fuel level is displayed.
f Please observe the chapter CAPACITIES on
Page 291.
If the vehicles inclination changes (e.g. going up
or downhill), minor deviations in the indication may
occur.
Note
If the tank is near empty and you top up with only
a small quantity of fuel, this cannot be registered
by the level gauge and calculation of the range re-
maining is impossible.
Warning light A
When the engine is running, the warning light
of the level gauge lights up if less than approx.
2.6 U.S. gallons (10 liters) of fuel remains in the
tank or the range on remaining fuel falls below ap-
prox. 30 miles (50 km).
computer.
f Fill up at the next opportunity.
Caution!
To prevent damage to the emission control
system and engine.
f Never drive the tank completely out of fuel.
f Avoid high cornering speeds after the warning
lights have come on.
If the level gauge warning light flashes, there
has been a system fault.
computer.
There will then be no reserve warning.
f To remedy the fault, go to an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Fuel
A- Adjustment button for clock
B- Clock
C- Outside temperature display
Clock
The clock is blanked out approximately four min-
utes after the ignition is switched off or when the
car is locked.
Setting the time
Warning!
Risk of an accident and loss of control.
Setting hours
f Press adjustment button A for about one sec-
ond.
Hour display flashes.
f Turn button in the appropriate direction:
to right increase hours figure
to left decrease hours figure.
Adjustment in hours turn button briefly
Fast adjustment (display cycles)
turn and hold button.
Setting minutes
f Press adjustment button again.
Minutes display flashes.
f Set by rotating as in hours mode.
Leaving adjustment mode
Automatically after one minute or:
f Press adjustment button again.
When adjustment mode is deliberately left by
pressing the button, the time begins precisely to
the second.
Note
The time mode can be changed between 12h and
24h in the on-board computer.
Outside temperature
The outside temperature display C does not indi-
cate, if ice is on the road.
Even if a temperature above 32F (0C) is dis-
played, ice may still form on the road, for instance
on bridges or when the road passes through a
heavily shaded area.
With the engine warmed up and running at a speed
of 5000 rpm, the engine oil pressure should be
approx. 3.5 bar.
If oil pressure drops abruptly and a message
is displayed on the on-board computer when
the engine is running on or when driving:
f Stop immediately in a suitable place.
f Switch off the engine.
f Check oil level.
Please observe the chapter OIL DISPLAY AND
MEASUREMENT OF THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
on Page 118.
Please observe the chapter ENGINE OIL
LEVEL on Page 201.
f Add engine oil if necessary.
Caution!
f Do not continue driving if there is an obvious oil
leak.
f Do not continue driving if the warning lights
come on even though oil level is correct.
f Have the fault remedied at the nearest
If the battery voltage drops abruptly, a warning
message will be displayed by the on-board compu-
ter.
If the warning is displayed by the on-board
computer while the engine is running or while
driving:
f Stop the car in a safe place and stop the
engine.
Possible causes
Defect in the battery charging system.
Broken drive belt.
Warning!
Risk of an accident and risk of engine dam-
age.
A broken drive belt means there is no power
assistance to the steering (more effort is re-
quired to steer) and coolant pump function
will stop.
f Do not continue driving.
f Have the fault remedied at the nearest author-
Engine Oil Pressure
Battery
The warning light in the instrument panel comes
on when the ignition is first turned on and remains
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not
come on, have the bulb replaced promptly.
board computer come on and remain on while
driving, it suggests:
a potential engine control problem and the
need for system service or
an improperly fastened tank cap or
refuelling with engine running.
Although the vehicle is usually driveable and will
not require towing, see your dealer for service as
soon as possible.
Caution!
If the Check engine light in the instrument
panel is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Prolonged driving with the Check engine light
on could cause damage to the emission con-
trol system. It also could affect fuel economy
and driveability.
f Have the fault remedied at the nearest author-
ized Porsche dealer immediately.
The central warning light on the instrument panel
lights up if there are warning messages in the
INFO menu.
The messages can be called in the on-board
computer INFO menu:
f Please observe the chapter INFO WARNING
MESSAGES on Page 102.
The warning light on the instrument panel lights
up:
if the handbrake is on,
if the brake fluid level is low,
if the brake pads have reached the wear limit,
if the brake circuit division is defective.
Additionally, a warning is displayed by the on-
board computer.
Check Engine
Warning Light
Central warning light
Brake warning light USA
Brake warning light Canada
On-Board Computer (BC)
Display field
The display field is beneath the tachometer.
With ignition switched on,
with engine running.
Operation, controls
It is not possible to describe all details of the on-
board computer functions in this Owners Manual.
However, the examples will quickly familiarize you
with the operational principle and help you to
navigate through the menu structure.
You can restore the factory default settings at any
time by using the SET menu.
Operating lever
The on-board computer is operated with the lower
left lever on the steering column.
Selecting functions of the on-board
computer
f Push lever up 3 or down 4.
Confirming selection (Enter)
f Push the lever forward 1.
Moving back one or several selection levels
f Pull the lever back 2 once or several times or
f Select the arrow on the on-board computer
display with the operating lever and push the
operating lever forward 1.
Note
You can always return to the basic menu by pulling
the operating lever several times.
Functions and display possibilities
A- Digital speedometer
B- Central display
C- Bottomdisplay
Note
The available items and displays in the on-board
computer depend on the equipment of your vehi-
cle. For this reason it is possible that some of the
items and displays shown here are not available in
your on-board computer.
Basic setting
Central display: .... Radio station
The central line B of the on-board computer can
be selected in the SET menu.
Calling on-board computer functions in
display C
f Push operating lever up or down
(selectionfield D must be switched off).
The following displays can be called step by step:
Average speed ( mph),
Average consumption ( mpg),
Range on remaining fuel (mi ),
Tire pressure
Navigation information
(if activated in the SET menu).
Note
The values Average speed, Average consump-
tion and Daily trip mileage can be reset to zero
in the SET menu.
Switching selection field Don or off
f Push operating lever forward or back.
Arrowsymbol Efor continuation
Arrow symbol:
f Push operating lever down in order to page
through the menu.
Arrow symbol:
f Push operating lever up in order to page
through the menu.
D- Selection field
E - Continuation arrow symbols
LIMIT
Acoustic warning signal for speed limit
The acoustic warning signal can be activated for
speeds above 6 mph (10 km/ h).
The signal sounds when the preset speed is ex-
ceeded.
For the signal to sound again, the driving speed
must fall below the preset speed by at least
3 mph (5 km/ h).
Switching on selection field D
f Push operating lever forward.
Setting the speed
f Select LIMIT with the operating lever.
Option 1:
Accepting current speed
The acoustic warning signal is activated for the
current speed.
Display:
Option 2:
Presetting speed
f Select LIMIT active with the operating lever:
f If not active, push the operating lever for-
ward.
f Select xx mph with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever slightly up or down until
the desired speed is reached.
upwards: speed is increased
downwards: speed is decreased
Note:
Holding the lever pressed up or down for a
longer period will adjust the speed in steps of
6 mph (10 km/ h).
Switching the acoustic warning signal off
f Select LIMIT active with the operating lever.
not active
active
Display:
INFO
Warning messages
Calling warning messages
f Select INFO with the operating lever.
Any existing warning messages can be called us-
ing the operating lever.
You also can call warning messages which were
cancelled during the journey (but only until the next
time the ignition is switched on).
f Push operating lever forwards or pull back-
wards.
The display returns to the Info menu.
TEL
Telephone information
Recalling telephone information
f Select TEL with the operating lever.
Note
You can recall phone calls, e.g. calls that arrived
during your absence, via the menu item Missed
calls.
Example:
Selecting from the telephone book and
calling
f Select Phone book with the operating lever.
f Select a person to call and push the operating
lever forward.
The connection is established.
f Push the operating lever forward to end the
call.
Incoming call
f Select Accept or Refuse and push the
operating lever forward.
Note
Rejected phone calls can be recalled with the
menu item Missed calls.
CHRONO
Stopwatch
You can use the stopwatch to measure time inter-
vals, e.g. on the race circuit or on work-related
journeys. Measured lap times can be stored and
evaluated if the vehicle is equipped with Porsche
Communication Management (PCM).
f Please observe the chapter Sport display in
Stopwatch on the instrument panel
The stopwatch has an analogue and a digital dis-
play.
The large pointer of the analogue display meas-
ures the seconds. The two small pointers measure
hours and minutes. The display re-starts at zero af-
ter 12 hours.
Seconds and increments of 1/ 100th of a second
can be read on the digital display.
The digital display and the display in the on-board
computer can indicate up to 99 hours and
59 minutes.
The stopwatch can be swivelled both to the left
and to the right.
Stopwatch displays:
on the stopwatch on the instrument panel,
in the on-board computer menu CHRONO,
on the performance display in the PCM.
Starting/ stopping stopwatch
All stopwatch displays are started and stopped via
the on-board computer menu CHRONO.
Note on operation
When you leave the CHRONO menu while the stop-
watch is running, measurement will continue.
The stopwatch stops after the ignition is switched
off. If the ignition is switched on again within ap-
prox. 4 minutes, the stopwatch will continue to
run.
The only way to reset the stopwatch to zero is by
selecting Reset in the CHRONO menu.
Starting the timing
The selection field is switched on.
f Select CHRONO with the operating lever.
The time runs on all stopwatch displays.
The on-board computer display changes to the
Stop timing/ Intermediate time selection.
PCM information
The performance display in the Trip/ Sport dis-
play/ Begin trip menu must be selected in order to
analyse the data in the PCM.
Stopping the timing
After time measurement is started, the on-board
computer display changes to the Stop timing/ In-
termediate time.
f Select Stop timing with the operating lever.
f Push lever forward.
The time is stopped in all stopwatch displays,
and the on-board computer display changes to
the Continue/ Reset selection.
The timing can be continued or reset to zero.
PCM information
After timing has been stopped, a prompt asking
whether the time is to be stored appears on the
PCM.
Continue timing
After timing has been stopped, the on-board com-
puter display changes to the Continue/ Reset se-
lection.
The stopwatch displays continue the timing.
The on-board computer display returns to the
Stop timing/ Intermediate time selection. You
can stop the stopwatch or measure an inter-
mediate time.
Resetting the time
After timing has been stopped, the on-board com-
puter display changes to the Continue/ Reset se-
lection.
f Select Reset with the operating lever.
The display returns to the Start timing
selection.
The stopwatch displays in the instrument panel
and the on-board computer are reset to zero.
A- Lap
B- Intermediate time
Displaying intermediate times
Several intermediate times can be displayed for a
route or for a lap on the race circuit. The interme-
diate times B are for your information.
Measured lap times A can be stored and evaluat-
ed if the vehicle is equipped with Porsche Commu-
nication Management (PCM).
To display an intermediate time:
After timing has been started, the on-board com-
puter display changes to the Stop timing/ Inter-
mediate time selection.
f Select Intermediate time with the operating
lever and push the operating lever forwards.
The intermediate time will be displayed for
approx. 5 seconds.
The on-board computer display then returns to the
Stop timing/ Intermediate time selection.
f You can stop the stopwatch or measure anoth-
er intermediate time.
In order to start timing a newlap:
The New lap? selection appears for 5 seconds
after selection of Intermediate time.
f Select New lap? with the operating lever and
push the operating lever forwards.
The new lap is displayed on the on-board compu-
ter and the PCM. Timing on the on-board computer
and on the PCM begins from zero. The stopwatch
in the instrument panel continues to show the total
time.
f The on-board computer display returns to the
Stop timing/ Intermediate time selection after
a short period.
f You can stop the stopwatch or measure anoth-
er intermediate time or a new lap.
PCM information
If you wish to store the lap time in the PCM, the
performance display in the Trip/ Sport display/ Be-
gin trip menu of the PCM must be selected.
TPC
Tire pressure monitoring
Please observe the chapter TIRE PRESSURES on
Page 232.
The tire pressure monitoring continuously
monitors tire pressure and tire temperature on all
four wheels and warns the driver when the tire
pressure is too low.
The display as well as the settings for the tire
pressure monitoring take place on the on-board
computer.
However, you must still adjust the tire pressure on
the wheel.
f The driver is responsible for filling the tires
correctly and making the correct settings on
the on-board computer.
The tire pressure monitoring offers the following
functions:
Display of the actual tire pressure while the
vehicle is in motion
Display of the deviation from the required
pressure (refilling pressure)
Display of currently set tire size and type
Tire pressure warnings in two stages
Safety notes!
Despite the advantages offered by the tire
pressure monitoring, it is still the drivers
responsibility to update the corresponding
settings in the on-board computer and
maintain the pressure in the tires. Lowtire
pressure reduces the road safety of the
vehicle and destroys the tire and wheel.
f When a flat tire has been displayed, immedi-
ately stop in a suitable place and check the
tires for damage. If necessary, remedy the
damage with a tire sealant.
f Do not by any means continue to drive with
damaged tires.
f Sealing the tire with tire sealant is only an
emergency repair, so you can drive to the next
authorized Porsche dealer. The maximum per-
mitted speed is 50 mph (80 km/ h).
f Do not drive with tires whose tire pressure
drops again in a short period of time. In cases
of doubt, have tires checked by an authorized
Porsche dealer.
f Damaged tires must be immediately replaced
by an authorized Porsche dealer.
Tire repairs are not permissible under any
circumstances.
f If the tire pressure monitoring is defective (e.g.
defective wheel transmitter), contact an
authorized Porsche dealer immediately and
have the damage repaired.
The tire pressure will not be monitored by a
defective tire pressure monitoring.
f Tires lose air over time without a tire defect
being present. A tire pressure warning will then
appear in the on-board computer display.
Correct the tire pressure at the next oppor-
tunity.
f The tire pressure monitoring gives a warning
about tire damage due to natural pressure loss
as well as about a gradual loss of pressure due
to foreign objects.
The tire pressure monitoring cannot warn you
about tire damage that occurs suddenly (e.g.
flat tire due to abrupt external effects).
Tire pressure function of the on-board
computer
The tire pressure function of the on-board
computer displays the tire pressures (actual
pressure) dependent on temperature in the four
wheels.
You can watch the tire pressure rise as the
temperature increases while driving.
This display is only for information.
f Under no circumstances should the tire
pressures be changed based on this display.
Displaying the tire pressure function of the
on-board computer
f Push operating lever up or down until the tire
pressure function of the on-board computer
appears.
(The selection field must be switched off.)
Pressure info in Tire pressure menu
In accordance with physical principles, the air
pressure changes as the temperature changes.
The tire pressure increases or decreases by
around 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) for every 18F (10C)
change in temperature.
The tire pressure monitoring takes this relation-
ship between tire pressure and temperature into
account.
You can read the tire pressures to be
corrected in this display.
The tire pressure to be corrected (refill pressure)
is indicated on the displayed wheel.
Example: If 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) is displayed,
1.5 psi (0.1 bar) must be added to this tire.
Note
The Tire pressure menu can only be called up
when the vehicle is stationary.
Calling up the Info pressuredisplay
f Push operating lever forward in order to switch
on the selection field.
f Select TPC with the operating lever.
The display changes to the Tire pressure
menu.
f Select Info pressure with the operating lever.
Note
After the ignition is switched on, it can take up to
approx. 1 minute before all tire pressures are
displayed. Dashes (-.-) appear instead of the tire
pressures.
Tire type info in Tire pressure menu
Information about the currently set tires:
Tire type:
Summer tires, winter tires
Tire size:
18, 19 inch
Info tires shows the current tire settings.
Calling up the Info tiresdisplay
menu.
f Select Info tires with the operating lever.
Tire selection in the Setmenu
menu.
f Select Set with the operating lever.
f Push the operating lever forward.
f Select desired tire type:
summer or winter.
A display for confirming the selected type of
tire appears.
f f f
f Select Continue and push the operating lever
forward.
f Select the appropriate tire size (18 or 19 inch)
and push operating lever forwards.
A display for confirming the selected tire size
appears.
Note
This menu is only displayed when different tire
sizes are approved.
f Select Continue and push the operating lever
forward.
Setting of the tire characteristics has only been
successfully completed when the message
Process complete is displayed by the on-board
computer.
f Select arrow (Back) and push the operating
lever forward. The display returns to the Tire
pressure menu.
The on-board computer additionally displays
the message System learning.
Note
The message Process aborted appears if the
setting process is interrupted. All entries made up
to this point are lost, and the original settings
remain in effect.
Only if the message Process complete appears
after the settings have been made will the tire
pressure monitoring re-learn the wheels.
f Please observe the chapter SYSTEM
LEARNING on Page 115.
Before fitting tires with sizes which are not stored
in the on-board computer, the missing information
should be supplemented in the on-board
computer.
f Consult a qualified specialist garage. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
f Use only tires approved by Porsche.
The available items in the Tire pressure menu
depend on the equipment of your vehicle. For this
reason it is possible that some of the items shown
here are not available on your on-board
computers display.
Load
(depending on equipment level)
menu.
f Select Load with the operating lever.
f Select partial load or full load and push the
operating lever forward.
f Please observe the chapter TIRE PRESSURES
FOR COLD TIRES on Page 290.
f Make sure that the tire pressures correspond
to the on-board computer settings. Correct the
tire pressures if necessary.
Tire pressure warnings
The tire pressure monitoring warns about loss in
pressure in two stages, depending on the amount
of pressure loss:
Stage 1 Add air
(3 to 6 psi (0.2 to 0.4 bar) loss in pressure)
Stage 2 Flat tire
(from 6 psi (0.4 bar) loss in pressure)
Stage 1 Add air
The pressure in the tire is too low by 3 to 6 psi (0.2
to 0.4 bar).
Driving with insufficient tire pressure reduces the
road safety of the vehicle and destroys the tire and
wheel.
f The tire pressure warning contains the
affected tire with the tire pressure to be added.
Correct the tire pressure at the next
opportunity.
This tire pressure warning appears with vehicle
stopped and can be deactivated.
The tire pressure warning light in the instrument
panel goes out when the tire pressure has been
corrected.
Stage 2 Flat tire
The pressure in the tire has dropped by more than
6 psi (0.4 bar). This significant pressure loss is a
danger to road safety.
f When the tire pressure warning has appeared
on the on-board computer, stop immediately at
a suitable location. Check the tire for signs of
damage. If necessary, fill in tire sealant and set
the correct tire pressure.
This tire pressure warning appears when driving
and can be deactivated.
panel goes out when the tire pressure has been
corrected.
Systemlearning
The tire pressure monitoring begins to learn the
wheels after a wheel change, wheel transmitter
replacement or update of the tire settings. During
this process, the tire pressure monitoring recog-
nises the tires and their locations. The on-board
computer displayes the message TPC inactive
system learning.
The tire pressure monitoring requires a certain
amount of time to learn the wheels. During this
time, the current tire pressures are not available
on the on-board-computer:
The display of the Tire pressure function of the
on-board computer shows lines.
The required pressures for cold tires at 68F
(20C) are indicated in the Info pressure
display in the Tire pressure menu.
Tire pressure warnings are issued without tire
pressure and position information (figure) as
soon as the vehicles own wheels have been
detected and the tire pressure warning light
has gone out.
Position and pressure information is displayed as
soon as the tire pressure monitoring has assigned
the wheels identified as belonging to the vehicle to
the correct wheel positions.
The wheel learning process takes place
exclusively when the vehicle is being driven.
f Manually check the tire pressure at all wheels
and correct the tire pressure to the required
value.
Changing a wheel and replacing tires
f New wheels must be fitted with radio transmit-
ters for the tire pressure monitoring.
Before tires are changed, the battery charge
state of the wheel transmitters should be
checked at an authorized Porsche dealer.
f Switch the ignition off when changing a wheel.
The tire settings on the on-board computer must
be updated after changing a wheel.
A message appears if the characteristics of the
new tires do not agree with the on-board computer
settings.
f Update the on-board computer settings when
the vehicle is stationary the next time.
The warning light in the speedometer lights up:
When a loss in pressure has been detected
If the tire pressure monitoring is faulty
When learning newly mounted wheels/ wheel
sensors, as long as the vehicles own wheels
have not yet been recognized.
panel goes out only when the cause of the fault
has been rectified.
No monitoring
In the event of faults the tire pressure monitoring
cannot monitor the tire pressure.
The warning light on the instrument panel lights up
and a corresponding message appears on the
on-board computer.
Monitoring is not active when:
the tire pressure monitoring is faulty,
wheel transmitters for the tire pressure
monitoring are missing,
temporarily after changing a wheel (learning
phase),
more than four wheel transmitters are
detected,
there is external interference by other radio
sources, e.g. wireless headphones,
tire temperatures are too high.
Pressure increase as the result of
temperature increase
A Tire pressure
B Tire temperature
C Tire pressures for cold tires
D Tire pressure for hot tires
E Pressure increase as the result of temperature
increase
F Pressure drop in faulty/ leaking tires
1. Required-pressure line
2. Warning stage 1 (from 3 to 6 psi
(0.2 bar to 0.4 bar))
3. Warning stage 2 (from 6 psi (0.4 bar))
Warning light
In accordance with physical principles, the air
pressure changes as the temperature changes.
The tire pressure increases or decreases by
around 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) for every 18F (10C)
change in temperature.
The tire pressure monitoring takes this relation-
ship between tire pressure and temperature into
account.
Tire pressure specifications
Information on tire pressure for public roads can
be found in this Owner's Manual or on the tire-
pressure plate in the left door aperture.
These values apply to cold tires at 68F (20C)
ambient temperature.
OIL
Display and measurement of the engine
oil level
Caution!
f Regularly check the oil level after refuelling.
f Do not allow the oil level to fall below the mini-
mum mark.
Conditions for measuring the oil level
1. It is important to ensure that the vehicle is
horizontal for correct oil level measurement
to occur.
2. Engine is off.
3. Ignition on.
Oil return time
Before the oil level is measured, the engine oil has
to have flowed back into the oil pan.
The time taken for the engine oil to flow back de-
pends on the engine temperature and how long
the engine has been stopped.
This waiting time is counted down in the on-board
computer display when the ignition is switched on.
The oil level display segments start to cycle.
f It is best to measure the engine oil level before
embarking on a journey (if the vehicle has not
been driven for an extended period) or with the
engine at operating temperature. Shorter wait-
ing times are achieved in this way.
Initiating oil level measurement
f Switch ignition on (do not start the engine).
The engine-oil level measurement display ap-
pears in the on-board computer.
f Allow waiting time to elapse.
f Once the measurement has been completed,
you can read off the engine oil level on the seg-
ment display.
If the segments are filled in up to the top line,
the oil level has reached the maximum mark.
f Under no circumstances add engine oil.
If the bottom segment is filled in, the oil level
has reached the minimum mark.
f Add engine oil immediately.
If the segment flashes, the oil level has
dropped to below the minimum mark.
f Add engine oil immediately.
The difference between the minimum and maxi-
mum marks on the segment display is approx.
1.2 liters.
Each segment of the display corresponds to ap-
prox. 0.4 liter.
f Add engine oil if necessary.
Please observe the chapter ENGINE OIL LE-
VEL on Page 201.
Before adding oil, switch ignition off.
Never add more engine oil than required
to reach the maximum mark.
Oil level measurement during refuelling
The oil level is automatically measured during re-
fuelling.
Preconditions
1. Ignition is switched off.
2. If the engine is at operating temperature, at
least 5 minutes must elapse between parking
the vehicle and starting the engine.
3. Refuelling completed within 15 minutes.
When the ignition is switched on, the engine oil lev-
el is shown on the segment display.
Measurement will be stopped if the above require-
ments are not met.
f Start oil level measurement in the OIL menu
or
f Start oil level measurement by switching on
the ignition.
Failure
A failure of the oil level display is indicated by a
warning message in the on-board computer.
The oil level measurement can also be
initiated in the OILmenu:
Initiating measurement
f Select OIL with the operating lever.
Measurement is started.
SET
Basic setting on on-board computer
Changing the basic setting of the on-board
computer
f Select SET with the operating lever.
f Select the desired function with the operating
lever:
Reset
Reset all,
Reset average consumption,
Reset average speed,
Reset trip counter
Units
Speedometer
km - km/ h, miles - mph
Consumption
l/ 100 km, mls/ gal (USA), mpg (UK), km/ l
Temperature
Celsius, Fahrenheit
Tire pressure
bar, psi
Display
(Select central line of the on-board
computer)
Change display
Audio information (set radio station)
Range on remaining fuel
Empty
Telephone Info
When Telephone information is active, incom-
ing telephone calls are displayed on the on-
board computer.
Navigation
Integrated in the BC
(Navigation instructions can be recalled on the
on-board computer display)
When turning off
(Navigation instructions are only shown before
changing direction)
Basic setting
Restore the basic setting of the on-board com-
puter
Language
Select language version
12/ 24h mode
Select time mode:
12h (small squares on the right side of the time
display for AM/ PM),
24h
General information regarding the
on-board computer functions
Range on remaining fuel
The range on remaining fuel is continuously recal-
culated during the journey based on the fuel level,
current consumption and average consumption.
The more the fuel level falls, the more spontan-
eously the display reacts. For this reason, the
range on remaining fuel is not displayed if less
than 9 miles (15 kilometers).
If the vehicle's inclination changes while driving or
refuelling, incorrect range information may tempo-
rarily be given.
Note
If the tank is nearly empty and you top up with only
a small quantity of fuel, an accurate range on re-
maining fuel is impossible.
Average consumption and average speed
The values displayed are based on the distance
travelled since the last reset to zero.
You can set the starting time for a measurement
before or during the trip.
Switching the ignition off does not reset the meas-
urements. It is therefore possible to collect values
over long periods.
Disconnecting the car battery will cause these
memories to be erased.
memories to be erased.
Tire pressure
The Tire pressure function of the on-board com-
puter displays the tire pressures dependent on
temperature in the four wheels. You can watch the
tire pressure rise and fall while driving.
The display is only for information. To correct the
tire pressures, always use the displayed values
from the Info pressure display in the Tire pres-
sure menu.
Warnings on the instrument panel and the on-board computer
If a warning message appears, always refer to the corresponding chapters in the Owners Manual.
Warning messages are issued only if all measurement preconditions are met. Therefore, check all fluid levels regularly
in particular, always check the engine oil level after refuelling.
Instrument
panel
On-board
computer
Text display on on-board
computer
Meaning/ measure
Seat belt Driver and passengers must fasten their seat
belts.
Handbrake Handbrake is still on.
Ignition key
not removed
Replace battery
in ignition key
Replace the remote-control battery.
Ignition lock faulty,
please go to workshop
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Ignition lock faulty,
visit workshop now
Porsche dealer.
Relieve steering Relieve the steering lock by moving the steering
wheel to the left or right.
Steering locked The steering wheel lock remains engaged.
Porsche dealer.
Lights on
Parking light on
Check left/ right dipped beam(low
beam)
also applies to:
front side lights, direction indicator,
high beam, fog lights, side indicator
light, brake light, tail light, rear fog
light, reversing light, raised brake
light, side marker
The reported light is faulty. Check bulb.
Porsche dealer.
Daytime
driving lights off
Daytime driving lights switch off when the engi-
ne is shut off. Switch on lights if necessary.
Headlight beam
adjustment faulty
Porsche dealer.
Front lid not closed Close luggage compartment lid properly.
Rear lid not closed Close engine compartment lid properly.
Lid opener front
faulty
Luggage compartment lid release is faulty.
Porsche dealer.
Rain sensor faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Refill washer fluid
LIMIT
Cannot be accepted
with vehicle stopped
The current speed can only be accepted for the
acoustic warning signal when the vehicle is in
motion.
LIMIT
30
Selected speed limit (e.g. 30 mph) for the
acoustic warning signal has been exceeded.
Adjust your speed if necessary.
Instrument
panel
On-board
computer
computer
Meaning/ measure
Fuel gauge war-
ning light
Consider remaining range Refuel at next opportunity.
Check engine oil level Start engine oil level measurement in the
on-board computer.
The vehicle must be horizontal and the ignition
must be switched on.
Engine oil pressure too low Stop immediately at a suitable place, measure
oil level with the on-board computer and, if ne-
cessary, add engine oil.
Warning light
Temperature gau-
ge
Engine temperature too high Switch engine off and let it cool.
Check coolant level and, if necessary,
add coolant.
Temperature gau-
ge warning light
flashes
Check coolant level Switch engine off and let it cool.
Check coolant level and, if necessary, add
coolant.
Engine diagnostics workshop Consult your authorized Porsche dealer.
Reduced engine power Consult your authorized Porsche dealer.
Temperature gau-
ge warning light
flashes
Failure of
engine compartment blower
Consult your authorized Porsche dealer.
Warning Battery/ generator Stop at a safe place and switch the engine off.
Do not continue driving.
Porsche dealer.
Oil pressure gauge faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Oil level display faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Instrument
panel
On-board
computer
computer
Meaning/ measure
Oil temperature gauge faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Indicator faulty Coolant indicator failed.
Porsche dealer.
Brake pad wear Have the brake pads changed immediately at an
Warning Brake fluid level Stop immediately in a suitable place.
Do not continue driving. Have the fault remedied
at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Warning Brake circuit division Stop immediately in a suitable place.
Do not continue driving. Have the fault remedied
ABS failure Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
PSM off Porsche Stability Management has been swit-
ched off.
PSM on Porsche Stability Management has been swit-
ched on.
PSM failure Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
PASM Normal/ Sport Indicator for selected PASM mode
PASM failure Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
PASM indicator faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Instrument
panel
On-board
computer
computer
Meaning/ measure
Sport mode failure Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Airbag systemfault Airbag is faulty.
Porsche dealer.
Check passengers seat setting Weight sensing is impaired on the front
passenger's seat (Advanced Airbag).
Correct the seating position, set the backrest
upright, do not support weight on the armrests,
or lift on the handles.
Failure spoiler control Driving stability is impaired.
Adjust your driving style. Reduce speed.
Porsche dealer.
Display of
selector lever posi-
tion flashes
Selector lever is not engaged Tiptronic S:
Selector lever can be between two positions.
Engage the selector lever correctly.
Move selector lever to P Tiptronic S:
Move selector lever to position P before with-
drawing key fromignition lock.
Apply brake Tiptronic S:
Apply the brake when starting.
Depress clutch pedal Manual transmission:
Depress clutch pedal when starting.
Move selector lever
to position P or N
Tiptronic S:
The vehicle can be started only in the selector
lever position P or N.
Display of
selector lever posi-
tion flashes
Tiptronic emergency run Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Instrument
panel
On-board
computer
computer
Meaning/ measure
Systemfault
Go to workshop
Several systems may have failed. Adjust your
driving style. Reduce speed.
Porsche dealer.
Failure of fuel level indicator
Workshop
Porsche dealer.
Service in km/ days Service indicator
Bring the vehicle in for service no later than af-
ter the distance/time shown has elapsed.
However, it is the intervals in the Guarantee
and Maintenance booklet that are decisive.
Service now Service indicator
Have your vehicle serviced at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Failure
Convertible-top control
Activate convertible top in opposite direction.
If there is a failure:
Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
Convertible top not in limit position Fully open or close convertible top
Opening convertible top Message goes out in final position
Closing convertible top Message goes out in final position
Close rear lid The convertible top cannot be operated with the
rear lid open.
Flat tyre! Tyre pressure monitoring systemhas detected
a serious pressure loss.
Stop in a suitable place and check tyres for
damage. Fill in tyre sealant if necessary.
Instrument
panel
On-board
computer
computer
Meaning/ measure
Add air The tyre pressure monitoring systemhas
detected a gradual pressure loss. Correct tyre
pressure at the next opportunity.
TPC inactive
Systemlearning
The tyre pressure monitoring systemis learning
the wheels on the vehicle. The tyre pressure
monitoring systemis searching for the tyres
and their position. During this period the current
pressure specifications are not available on the
on-board computer.
TPC inactive The tyre pressure monitoring systemis faulty.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.*
TPC inactive
Brief disturbance
TPC inactive
Too many wheel transmitters
The tyre pressure monitoring systemis tempo-
rarily deactivated by excessive tyre tempera-
tures (approx. 120 C (248F)) or external
interference (e.g. fromother wheel transmitters
inside the car). Once the source of the interfer-
ence is removed, the systemis automatically
reactivated.
Wheel change?
Input new
TPC settings!
Update the settings in the TPC menu of the
on-board computer at the next opportunity.
Wrong entries will affect the correct pressure
information in the menu. The safety of your
vehicle is at risk.
TPC
Indicator faulty
The display of the tyre pressure monitoring
systemis faulty.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.*
Instrument
panel
On-board
computer
computer
Meaning/ measure
Acknowledging warning messages
Warning messages can be deleted from the on-board computer display.
f Push the on-board computer operating lever forward.
You can recall erased warning messages in the INFO menu.
Operational readiness of the emergency flasher
does not depend on the ignition lock and turn sig-
nal lever position.
f If your car is disabled or parked under emer-
gency conditions switch on the emergency
flasher in the dashboard.
All turn signals and the indicator light in the
switch flash with the same frequency.
Warning!
f Whenever stalled or stopped for emergency re-
pairs, move the car well off the road. Switch on
the emergency flasher and mark the car with
road flares or other warning devices.
f Do not remain in the car. Someone approach-
ing from the rear may not realize your vehicle
is stopped and cause a collision.
Danger of fire.
contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or
other flammable material.
Hot engine compartment components can
burn skin on contact.
down sufficiently.
Emergency Flasher Switch
If the ignition key is withdrawn and the door is
opened while the lights (not the parking light or
Welcome Home lighting) are on, a chime warns of
possible battery discharge.
In some countries, differences are possible
due to provisions of law.
Note on operation
Further individual light functions (e.g. daytime driv-
ing lights) are available in vehicles with the Sport
Chrono package.
Welcome Home Lighting
Switching on
f Move light switch to the HOME position.
For improved visibility and security when you get
in and out of the car, the fog lights and the tail
lights remain on for a certain period of time:
When you get out of the car, the lights are
turned on for approx. 30 seconds after the
door is opened. The off-delay time resumes
when the vehicle is locked.
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono package,
the PCM can be used to set the off-delay time.
This setting also changes the lighting period
for unlocking the vehicle.
Please observe the chapter Individual
instructions.
The lights are turned on for approx.
30 seconds when the vehicle is unlocked.
The lights go out if the ignition is switched on
or when leaving the Welcome Home lighting.
Light Switch
Lights switched off
Welcome Home Function
Parking lights, side marker lights,
license plate light, instrument illumination
Lowbeam, high beam
Only with ignition on
Fog lights in addition to parking lights or
low beam:
Pull switch to first click.
Indicator light on.
The fog lights will go out automatically
when the high beams are switched on.
Rear fog light in addition to the fog
lights:
Pull switch to second click.
Indicator light on.
Automatic Headlight Beam
Adjustment
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights feature
automatic headlight beam adjustment.
When the ignition is switched on, the level of the
headlight beam automatically changes in accord-
ance with the vehicle load.
The level of the headlight beam is automatically
kept constant during acceleration and braking.
Checking operation
1. Switch the low beam on.
2. Insert ignition key and switch ignition on.
The light beam first dips all the way down and
is then adapted to the vehicle load.
If this test item is not met, the headlight beam
adjustment system must be checked by an author-
Turn Signal / Headlight Dimmer /
Parking light / Flasher Lever
Turn signals, low beam and high beam are ready
for operation when the ignition is on.
1 Turn signal left
2 Turn signal right
Push the lever to the upper or lower pressure
point turn signals flash three times
3 High beam
4 Headlight flasher
Lever in center position Lowbeam
When high beam and headlight flasher are select-
ed, the blue indicator light in the tachometer is lit.
The turn signal lever turns off automatically when
the steering wheel is straightened out after com-
pleting a turn.
Lane changer
f To indicate your intention when changing lanes
on the freeway, slightly lift or depress the lever
to the resistance point.
The lever will return to the OFF position when
released.
f If the frequency of the display becomes notice-
able faster, check the operation of the turn sig-
nal bulbs.
Headlight flasher
(With ignition on or off)
f To flash the headlights to oncomming motor-
ists, slightly pull the lever toward the steering
wheel and then release it.
The blue indicator light in the tachometer will
go on/ off as you pull/ release the lever.
Parking light
The parking light can only be switched on when
the ignition is switched off.
f Move the lever up or down to switch on the
right or left parking light.
Windshield Wiper / Washer Lever
Warning!
Danger of injury when the windshield wipers
operate unintentionally.
Risk of damage to the windshield and wiper
system.
f Avoid running the wiper blades over a dry wind-
shield to prevent scratching the glass. Spray
washer fluid on the windshield first.
A scratched windshield will reduce visibility.
f Always loosen wiper blades from frozen glass
before operating wipers to prevent damage to
the wiper motor or blades.
f Always switch off windshield wipers in car
wash to prevent them wiping unintentionally
(intermittent or sensor operation).
f Always switch off windshield wipers before
cleaning the windshield to avoid unintentional
operation (intermittent or sensor operation).
f Do not operate the headlight washer in car
washes.
f Do not operate headlight washer when it is
frozen.
Front wiper and headlight washer system
0 Windshield wipers off
1 Rain sensor operation for front
windshield wipers
f Move wiper lever upwards to the first click.
Please observe the chapter RAIN SENSOR on
Page 135.
2 Windshield wipers slow
f Move wiper lever upwards to the second click.
3 Windshield wipers fast
f Move wiper lever upwards to the third click.
4 Front windshield wiper one-touch oper-
ation:
f Move wiper lever downwards. The front wind-
shield wipers wipe once.
5 Windshield wipers and washer system:
f Pull wiper lever towards the steering wheel.
The washer system sprays and wipes while the
lever is pulled towards the steering wheel.
When the wiper lever is released, a few drying
wipes are executed.
A - Headlight washer (Vehicles with Bi-Xenon
headlights):
The washer sprays only while low beam or high
beam is switched on.
f Briefly push button A to operate headlight
washer system.
f If heavily soiled, repeat wash.
The headlight washer system automatically sprays
once for every ten times the front windshield
washer system is operated.
Note
The windshield washer nozzles are heated
when the ignition is on, as a precaution against
freezing.
Rear Wiper
6 Rear windowwiper intermittent
operation
f Move wiper lever forwards to the first click.
The rear window wiper wipes at preset inter-
vals.
The rear wiper is automatically switched off when
a speed of 130 mph (210 km/ h) is exceeded. It is
switched on again when the speed falls below
118 mph (190 km/ h).
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono package, fur-
ther rear wiper functions can be selected via the
PCM.
Rain sensor
In vehicles with a rain sensor the amount of rain or
snow which has settled on the windshield is
measured. Wiper speed is automatically adjusted
accordingly.
Switching on
f Move wiper lever upwards to the first click.
Switching off
f Move wiper lever to position 0.
The rain sensor remains switched off if the wiper
lever is already in position 1 when the ignition is
switched on.
To switch the rain sensor on again:
f Move wiper lever to position 0 and then to
position 1 or
f Operate windshield washer system 5 or
f Change the sensitivity of the rain sensor with
four-stage switch A.
Switch-on is confirmed by one wipe of the wind-
shield.
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono package, fur-
ther rain sensor functions can be selected via the
PCM.
Changing the sensitivity of the rain sensor
Sensitivity can be set with switch A in 4 stages:
f Adjust switch A upwards
high sensitivity.
The setting is confirmed by one wipe of the
windshield.
f Adjust switch A downwards
low sensitivity.
Maintenance note
If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this may be as
a result of the following:
If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car
wash, wax residues may be adhering to the
windshield. These wax residues can only be
removed by using a special cleaning solution.
Please contact your authorized Porsche dealer
for further information.
The wiper blades may be damaged or worn
out.
f Replace wiper blades as soon as possible.
f Persistent dirt (e.g. insect remains) should be
regularly removed.
f Please observe the chapter CAR CARE IN-
A- Automatic speed control readiness off/ on
1- +SPEED/ SET (accelerate/ store)
2- SPEED (decelerate)
3- OFF (interrupt)
4- RESUME
Automatic Speed Control
The automatic speed control maintains any
selected speed between 15 mph and 145 mph
(30 km/ h and 240 km/ h) without you having to
use the accelerator pedal.
The automatic speed control is operated with the
lever on the steering wheel.
Vehicles with Tiptronic
Additional downshifts are carried out to help main-
tain the pre-selected speed (especially when driv-
ing downhill).
Warning!
Risk of accident and consequent personal in-
jury. A constant speed may not be safe in
heavy traffic, or on winding or slippery
roads.
With the speed control system engaged, the
engine speed will not return to idle when re-
moving the foot from the accelerator pedal.
f Do not use the speed control when it may be
unsafe to keep the car at a constant speed.
f Observe all local and national speed limits.
Switch automatic speed control
readiness on
f Press button A on the automatic speed control
lever.
Hold and store speed
f Bring the car to the desired speed with the
accelerator.
f Then briefly push the operating lever forward
(position 1).
Accelerating (e.g. to overtake)
Option 1
f Increase the speed as usual with the
accelerator.
When you ease off the accelerator, the
previously saved value is set again.
Option 2
f Push operating lever forward (position 1) until
the desired speed is reached.
The speed reached is maintained and stored
when the lever is released.
Option 3
f Push lever slightly forwards (position 1)
(amaximum of 10 times).
The speed is increased by 1 mph (1.6 km/ h)
each time.
Note on operation
Speed control operation is automatically interrupt-
ed if the speed is increased by more than approx.
16 mph (25 km/ h ) for longer than 20 seconds.
This green indicator light in the
speedometer now indicates readiness
Decelerating
Option 1
f Pull operating lever towards the steering wheel
(position 2) until the desired speed is reached.
The speed reached is maintained and stored
when the lever is released.
Option 2
f Briefly move lever towards the steering wheel
(position 2) (a maximum of 10 times).
The speed is reduced by 1 mph (1.6 km/ h)
each time.
Vehicles with Tiptronic
Additional downshifts are carried out to improve
deceleration (especially when driving downhill).
Interrupting automatic speed control
operation
f Pull operating lever downwards briefly
(position 3) or
f Operate brake or clutch pedal or
f Switch Tiptronic transmission to selector lever
position N.
f Please observe the chapter TIPTRONIC S on
Page 165.
The speed driven before the interruption remains
stored in the memory.
Automatic speed control operation is
interrupted automatically:
If the set vehicle speed is exceeded by more
than approx. 16 mph (25 km/ h) for longer than
20 seconds.
If the actual vehicle speed falls to approx.
6 mph (10 km/ h) below the set vehicle speed
for longer than 5 seconds (upward slopes).
For PSM control operations.
Resuming the stored speed
f Briefly push operating lever upwards
(position4).
The speed control accelerates/ decelerates
the vehicle to the stored speed.
The stored speed should only be recalled when
traffic conditions and the road surface so permit.
Switching automatic speed control
readiness off
f Press button A on the automatic speed control
lever.
The green readiness light in the speedometer
goes off.
When the vehicle is parked and the ignition
switched off, the memory is cleared.
Important note
On upward or downward slopes, the set speed
cannot always be maintained by the automatic
speed control.
To obtain sufficient engine braking or a better en-
gine-speed range, therefore, you have to select a
lower gear.
Automatic Air Conditioning System
The automatic air-conditioning system controls
the preselected interior temperature completely
automatically.
If necessary, the automatic system can be
manually influenced.
Automatic mode
f Press AUTO button I.
AUTO will appear on the display panel.
Air quantity and distribution are automatically
controlled and variations are compensated.
All automatic setting functions can be individually
changed.
This setting is retained until the appropriate
function button is pressed again or the AUTO
button is pressed.
A - Seat heating, left
B- Defrosting the windshield
C- Recirculating-air button
D- Temperature sensor
E - ECO button (air-conditioning compressor off/ on)
F - Heated rear window
G- Seat heater, right
H- Temperature button
I - AUTO button (automatic mode)
J - Air distribution to footwell
K - Air distribution to central and side vents
L - Air distribution to windshield
M- Blower speed button
Setting temperature
f Press button H upwards or downwards
respectively.
To suit personal comfort, the interior temperature
can be adjusted between 61F and 85F/ 16 and
29.5C.
Recommendation: 72F/ 22C.
If LO or HI appears on the display, the system
is operating at maximum cooling or heating pow-
er.
Automatic control is no longer active.
Note
If the preselected temperature is changed, the
blower speed can increase automatically in auto-
matic mode.
The desired temperature is reached more quickly
this way.
Sensors
To avoid affecting the performance of the air-con-
ditioning system:
f Do not cover the sun sensor on the instrument
panel or the temperature sensor D.
f Press button B (switch on or off).
The windshield is defogged or defrosted as
quickly as possible.
Air flows to the windshield only.
ECO switching compressor for air-
conditioning systemon and off
The air-conditioning compressor switches off
automatically at temperatures below approx.
37F/ 3C and cannot be switched on, even
manually.
Whenever outside temperatures exceed approx.
37F/ 3C, the air-conditioning compressor is
always switched on in automatic mode.
The compressor can be switched off to save fuel,
but control comfort is then limited:
f Press ECO button E.
The compressor is switched off.
f If the interior temperature is too high, switch
compressor back on or press AUTO button.
To dry incoming air in damp weather, do not
switch off the air-conditioning compressor.
This prevents fogging of windows.
Defrosting the windshield
f Press button M upwards or downwards
respectively.
The preset blower speed is increased or
decreased.
The speed stages are indicated by a bar display.
If the button is pressed downwards at the lowest
blower stage, the blower and automatic control
are switched off. OFF will appear on the display
field.
Pressing the button upwards or pressing the
AUTO button switches the blower and automatic
control back on again.
Warning!
Risk of accident due to impaired vision.
In recirculating-air setting, the windows may
fog up.
f Only select recirculating-air setting for short
periods.
f If the windows fog up, switch recirculating-air
setting off immediately by pressing the
circulating-air button again and select the
Defrost windshield function.
f f f
Adjusting blower speed
Recirculating-air setting
Switching recirculating-air setting on or off
f Press button C.
The outside-air supply is interrupted and only
the inside air is circulated.
Over approx. 37F/ 3C
If the air-conditioning compressor was off, it
switches on automatically. The duration of recircu-
lating-air setting is not limited.
Belowapprox. 37F/ 3C
The air-conditioning compressor is switched off.
Recirculating-air setting is automatically ended
after approx. 3 minutes.
Air distribution
The individual air distributions can be combined as
desired.
Recommended setting in Summer:
Air distribution to central and side vents.
Recommended setting in Winter:
Air distribution to footwell and windshield.
f Press button J .
The air flows to the footwell.
The selection appears on the display panel.
f Press button K.
The air flows from the central and side vents.
Vents must be open.
f Press button L.
The air flows to the windshield.
Note on operation
f On vehicles with the Sport Chrono package,
individual air conditioning settings can be
stored on your vehicle key.
Please observe the chapter Individual
instructions.
General instructions for air-conditioning
compressor
Can switch off briefly if engine is under an ex-
treme load to ensure sufficient engine cooling.
Switches off automatically at temperatures be-
low approx. 37F/ 3C and cannot be switched
on, even manually.
Operates most effectively with windows
closed.
If the car has been in the sun for a long time, it
is a good idea to ventilate the interior briefly
with the windows open.
Depending on the outside temperature and hu-
midity, condensation can drip from the evapo-
rator and form a pool under the vehicle.
This is normal and not a sign of leakage.
If uncooled air flows out when the lowest tem-
perature has been set, switch off the air-condi-
tioning compressor and have the fault repaired
Air distribution to footwell
Air distribution to central and side
vents
Air distribution to windshield
A- Continuous opening and closing
B- Setting vent direction
Central and Side Vents
f Rotate knurled wheel upward.
f Rotate knurled wheel downward.
Changing air flow direction
f Move the vanes to make the air flow in the
desired direction.
Outside air or conditioned air can be delivered
from all vents, depending on the air-distribution
setting on the operating panel.
Opening vents
Closing vents
Fresh-air Intake
To ensure proper air intake:
f Keep the fresh-air inlet between the luggage
compartment lid and the windshield free from
snow, ice and leaves.
The heated rear window/ door mirror heating is
ready for operation when the ignition is on.
Switching on
f Press button.
After approx. 15 minutes, the heating switches off
automatically.
The heater can be switched back on by pressing
the button again.
Switching off
f Press button.
Ashtray
Opening
f Open ashtray lid.
Heated Rear Window/Door Mirror
Heating
Emptying
f Open ashtray and carefully pull out ash insert.
f Leave ashtray lid open.
Push in ash insert.
Warning!
Danger of fire.
f Never use ashtray for waste paper disposal,
as it could pose a fire hazard.
Warning!
Danger of fire and burning.
The cigarette lighter is ready for use, regard-
less of the ignition lock position.
f Never leave unsupervised children in the car.
f Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter.
f Hold the lighter by the knob only.
Heating lighter
f Open ashtray lid.
f Push in knob of the cigarette lighter.
When ready for use, the lighter will snap back.
Note on operation
The lighter receptacle is not to be used for
electrical accessories (except for the tire filling
compressor).
Maximum power consumption: 150 W
f Please observe the chapter SOCKETS on
Page 254.
Cigarette Lighter
Cupholder
(holder for drinks cans and cups)
f Keep the cupholder closed while driving.
Warning!
Risk of scalding or damage due to spilling
drinks.
f Only use beverage containers which fit.
f Never put overfull containers in the cupholder.
f Never use hot drinks.
Extending cupholder
f Press the panel.
The panel opens.
f Press the symbol for the respective cupholder.
f Close panel in the middle.
The cupholders can be pulled out to hold larger
containers.
Pulling cupholder out
f Pull out holder (arrow).
f Insert container.
f Carefully slide holder inwards to adjust it to the
container size.
Closing cupholder
f Push cupholder drawer in.
f Open panel in the middle.
f Close and engage the cupholder.
f Close panel in the middle.
Storage in the Passenger
Compartment
Warning!
Unsecured luggage and heavy objects may
come loose during braking, rapid directional
changes or in an accident and cause serious
personal injury or death.
f Do not transport any heavy objects in the
storage trays.
f Do not carry unsecured luggage or objects in
the passenger compartment.
Additional storage possibilities
in the doors,
in the door sill next to the passengers seat,
in the center console,
behind the rear seat backrests
(only with the convertible top closed on the
Cabriolet, when opening the convertible top
there should not be any objects in the area
behind the rear seats risk of damage),
storage tray with coin holder between seats,
glove compartment with CD and pen holder,
clothes hook on the roof frame,
clothes hook on back of front backrests
(depending on vehicle equipment),
enlarged storage space by folding the rear
seat backrests forward.
Storage tray between the seats
Opening
f Press release button and lift the lid.
There is a coin holder and socket in the
forward part of the storage tray.
f Please observe the chapter SOCKETS on
Page 254.
Glove compartment
Warning!
Risk of injury by the glove compartment lid in
case of an accident.
f Keep the glove compartment closed while
driving.
Opening
f Pull the catch and open the lid.
Locking
f Lock the catch to secure the contents against
unauthorized access.
CD holder
Occupied drawers are indicated by a red window.
Opening drawers
f Push the button of the drawer you wish to
open.
Closing drawers
f Fold up CD drawer and close until it engages.
Pen holder
A pen can be clipped in on the right side of the CD
holder.
A - Opening luggage compartment lid
B - Opening engine compartment lid
Luggage Compartment Lid and
Engine Compartment Lid
Unlocking
f Operate the appropriate pull-button next to the
drivers seat.
The luggage compartment or engine compart-
ment is illuminated when the respective lid is
open.
Page 255.
The luggage compartment lid can also be un-
locked with the radio remote control.
f Please observe the chapter KEYS on
Page 19.
Important Note
If the vehicle battery is discharged, the luggage
compartment lid can be opened only by connect-
ing an external electrical power source.
f Please observe chapter ELECTRICAL SYS-
TEM on Page 254.
or the description inside the fuse box lid.
A warning message in the on-board computer
comes on if the lids are not completely closed.
f Fully close the lid.
Warning message
Opening luggage compartment lid
Caution!
Risk of damage to luggage compartment lid
or windshield wipers.
f Make sure that the windshield wipers are not
folded out forwards when opening the luggage
compartment lid.
f Raise lid slightly and unlatch the safety catch
with the lever (arrow).
Closing luggage compartment lid and
engine compartment lid
f Lower the lid and close it.
f Push the lid closed with the palm of your hand
in the area of the lock.
Check that the lid has correctly engaged in the
lock.
Warning!
Risk of loss of control or an accident, result-
ing in serious personal injury or death.
f Should you notice at any time while driving that
one of the lids is not secured properly, please
stop immediately in a suitable place and close
it.
The front lid may fly up impairing vision.
Luggage Compartment
(911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S)
Access covers
(on vehicles with DVD navigation or CD changer)
Opening
f Grasp access cover A or B at the handle and
open.
The drive for DVD navigation and the CD changer
can be found behind the access cover B.
Caution!
Risk of damage.
f Do not store any heavy, damp or heat-sensitive
objects behind the access covers.
Tool box
Opening
f Unlock turn-locks C.
f Open tool box and place it on the floor of the
luggage compartment.
E - Adapter for security wheel bolts
F - Tire filling compressor
G- Towing hook
H- Tool kit
I - Tire sealant
Closing
f Insert tool box into the guide pegs in the
luggage compartment floor.
f Close tool box and lock the turn-locks C.
Luggage Compartment
(911 Carrera 4, 911 Carrera 4S)
The position of the components in the luggage
compartment are dependent on the country equip-
ment and can vary from what is shown in this
manual.
DVD navigation
The drive for DVD navigation and the audio ampli-
fier are on the rear wall of the luggage compart-
ment.
Caution!
Risk of damage.
f Do not store any objects behind the access
cover A.
Tire sealant
The tire sealant is located behind the access
cover B.
f Open access cover B using the opening.
Tools
The tools are located under the floor plate of the
f Lift the floor plate on the opening and take out.
B- Access cover for tire sealant
C- Tire filling compressor
D- Tool kit
E - Towing lug
F - Adapter for security wheel bolts
Trunk Entrapment
Your vehicle is equipped with an internal trunk
release mechanism.
A person trapped in the luggage compartment
can release the lid from the inside using unlocking
handle A.
The handle A is fluorescent and glows in the dark.
A warning message in the on-board computer
lights up when unlocking handle A is operated.
f Stop the vehicle immediately when the warning
lights light up.
f Check the luggage compartment.
f Close the lid.
Function with vehicle stationary
If the luggage compartment lid is unlocked with
unlocking handle A, the lid can be opened from the
inside immediately.
Function with vehicle in motion
If the luggage compartment lid is unlocked with
unlocking handle A when a speed of 2 mph
(3 km/ h) is exceeded, the warning message in the
on-board computer lights up.
At the same time, the lid is unlocked and the latch
striker pops into the catch-hook position.
Warning light
Danger!
Risk of accident.
If the warning message in the on-board com-
puter lights up when the vehicle is in motion,
the lid may impact in front of the windshield
and can tear off.
You can lose control of the vehicle.
f Stop the vehicle immediately when the warning
message lights up.
f Check the luggage compartment.
f Close the lid.
Note
The lid cannot be opened from the inside if the bat-
tery is disconnected or empty.
Safety reasons require that you unscrewthe
latch striker of the lid lock if you plan to put
the vehicle out of operation for an extended
period.
Please consult your authorized Porsche dealer.
They will advise you about the necessary meas-
ures.
Note
f When loading the luggage compartment, make
sure that items of luggage or other objects
cannot become caught on handle A.
This could cause the luggage compartment to
open unintentionally.
Fire Extinguisher
In cars equipped with a fire extinguisher, the extin-
guisher is fitted to the front of the drivers seat.
Taking out fire extinguisher
1. Hold fire extinguisher with one hand and press
the PRESS button on the fastening strap with
the other hand (arrow).
2. Remove fire extinguisher from mounting.
Inserting fire extinguisher
1. Place fire extinguisher in the mounting.
2. Engage fastening strap lug A in the tension
jack and close tension jack (arrow).
Note
f Pay attention to the final control date on the
fire extinguisher.
If the fire extinguisher is used after its expira-
tion date has elapsed, it may not operate
properly.
f Follow the operating instructions on the fire
extinguisher.
f The functional ability of the fire extinguisher
should be checked by a specialist workshop
every 1-2 years.
f After use, have the fire extinguisher refilled.
1, 2, 3 - Programmable buttons
A- Light-emitting diode for status identification
HomeLink
The programmable HomeLink replaces up to three
original hand-held transmitters used to operate
various devices (e.g. garage door, gate to the
property, alarm system).
You can program buttons 1 to 3 with a frequency
of an original handheld transmitter.
Warning!
Risk of accident when using the HomeLink if
persons, animals or objects are within the
range of movement of the equipment that is
being operated.
f When using the HomeLink, ensure that no
persons, animals or objects are within the
range of movement of the equipment that is
being operated.
f Observe the safety notes for the original
hand-held transmitter.
Preconditions for operating and
programming the HomeLink:
Ignition is switched on.
Fog lights are switched off.
To operate the respective device:
f Press the appropriate button (1, 2 or 3).
Light-emitting diode A lights up during signal
transfer.
Note on operation
f Always use the HomeLink opener in the
direction of travel.
Otherwise, range restrictions cannot be ruled
out.
f Before selling the vehicle, delete the
programmed signals of the HomeLink.
f Please read the instructions for the original
hand-held transmitter to find out whether the
original transmitter is equipped with fixed or
changeable code.
Allocating signals to the buttons
f Please follow the operating instructions for the
original hand-held transmitter.
Prior to programming the HomeLink for the
first time
The following process deletes the standard codes
set at the factory. Do not repeat the process if you
program further buttons.
f Keep the two outer buttons 1 and 3
depressed for approx. 20 seconds until light-
emitting diode A begins to flash quickly.
All programmed signals of buttons 1 to 3 are
deleted.
HomeLink with fixed code system
1. Press the desired button until the light-emitting
diode begins to flash slowly.
You then have approx. 5 minutes to perform
steps 2 and 3.
2. Hold the original hand-held transmitter approx.
0 to 12 in. (0 to 30 cm) in front of the marked
position (figure) on the vehicle.
3. Press the transmit button on the original hand-
held transmitter until the fog lights flash three
times (up to approx. 45 seconds).
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to allocate other buttons.
Note
Several attempts with different distances between
the vehicle and the original hand-held transmitter
might be necessary.
The fog lights will flash once the 5 minutes have
been exceeded. Programming must be repeated
from the beginning in this case.
HomeLink with changeable code system
1. Allocate the required keys as for the systems
with fixed code (steps 1 to 3).
2. To synchronise the system:
Press the programming button on the receiver
for the garage door actuator.
Afterwards, you usually have approx.
30 seconds to initiate step 3.
3. Press the allocated HomeLink button twice.
(With some devices, the button to be allocated
must be pressed a third time in order to
complete the setting process.)
4. Repeat the programming steps to allocate
other buttons.
Note
f Please consult your authorized Porsche dealer
if you have not been able to successfully
allocate signals for the garage door opener to
the buttons even though you have carefully
followed the instructions in this chapter and
the operating instructions for the original hand-
held transmitter.
To reprogram a single button:
1. Press the desired button until the
light-emitting diode begins to flash slowly
(approx. 20 seconds).
You then have approx. 5 minutes to perform
steps 2 and 3.
2. Hold the original hand-held transmitter approx.
0 to 30 cm in front of the marked position
(figure) on the vehicle.
3. Press the transmit button on the original
hand-held transmitter until the fog lights flash
three times (up to approx. 45 seconds).
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to allocate other buttons.
Note
Several attempts with different distances between
the vehicle and the hand-held transmitter might be
necessary.
The fog lights will flash once the 5 minutes have
been exceeded. Programming must be repeated
from the beginning in this case.
Deleting programmed signals of the
HomeLink
(e.g., when selling the vehicle)
f Keep the two outer buttons 1 and 3
depressed for approx. 20 seconds until light-
emitting diode A begins to flash quickly.
All programmed signals of buttons 1 to 3 are
deleted.
Porsche Communication
Management (PCM)
f Refer to the separate operating instructions
before putting the PCM into operation.
Page 255.
Warning!
There is a danger of accident if you set or
operate the on-board computer, radio, navi-
gation system, telephone or other equipment
when driving.
This could distract you from the traffic and
cause you to lose control of the vehicle re-
sulting in serious personal injury or death.
f Operate the components while driving only if
procedures only with the vehicle stationary.
The reception conditions for the radio module inte-
grated in the PCM change continuously as you
drive. Interference from buildings, terrain and the
weather is unavoidable.
FM stereo reception is particularly susceptible to
varying reception conditions.
Electronic accessories should only be retrofitted
by a qualified specialist workshop.
Accessories which have not been tested and
approved by Porsche may impair radio reception.
Navigation
When put into operation for the first time, a
distance of approx. 30 miles (50 km) must be
driven in order for the navigation system to
complete the process of fine calibration.
The same applies when the tires are changed (e.g.
summer/ winter tires) or new tires fitted.
Full location accuracy is not yet achieved during
the fine-calibration process.
If the vehicle has been transported (e.g. ferry, car
train), the system may take a few minutes to deter-
mine the current location after it has been
switched on.
Serious tire slip (e.g. spinning wheels on snow)
may result in temporarily inaccurate navigation.
When the battery has been disconnected, it may
take up to 15 minutes before the navigation
system is operational again.
Car Audio Operation/Tips
FM reception
A vehicle is not an ideal place to listen to a radio.
Because the vehicle moves, reception conditions
are constantly changing.
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and noise from
other vehicles are all working against good recep-
tion.
Some conditions affecting FM may appear to be
problems when they are not.
The following characteristics are completely nor-
mal for a given reception area, and they do not in-
dicate any problem with the radio itself.
Note
Electronic accessories should only be installed by
your authorized Porsche dealer.
Equipment which has not been tested and ap-
proved by Porsche may impair radio reception.
Fading and drifting
FM range is limited to about 25 miles (40 km),
except for some high power stations.
If a vehicle is moving away from the desired sta-
tions transmitter, the signal will tend to fade and/
or drift. This condition is more prevalent with FM
than AM, and is often accompanied by distortion.
Fading and drifting can be minimized to a certain
degree by careful attention to fine tuning or selec-
tion of a stronger signal.
Static and fluttering
When the line-of-sight link between a transmitter
and vehicle is blocked by large buildings or moun-
tains, the radio sound may be accompanied with
static or fluttering because of the characteristic of
FM.
In a similar effect, a fluttering noise is sometimes
heard when driving along a tree-lined road.
This static and fluttering can be reduced by adjust-
ing the tone control for greater bass response un-
til the disturbance has passed.
Multipath
Because of the reflecting characteristics of FM,
direct and reflected signals may reach the antenna
at the same time (multipath) and cancel each other
out.
As a vehicle moves through these electronic dead
spots, the listener may hear a momentary flutter
or loss of reception.
Station swapping
When two FM stations are close to each other, and
an electronic dead spot, such as static or multi-
path area, interrupts the original signal, some-
times the stronger second signal will be selected
automatically until the original one returns.
This swapping can also occur as you drive away
from the selected station and approach another
station of a stronger signal.
Compact disc player
Caution!
To avoid damage to compact disc player and
discs.
f Use only compact discs labeled as shown, hav-
ing no dirt, damage or warpage.
f Never attempt to disassemble or oil any part
of the player unit.
Do not insert any object other than a disc into
the slot.
Remember there are no user-serviceable parts
inside the compact disc player.
f Do not allow the disc to sustain any finger-
prints, scrapes or stickers on the surfaces.
This may cause poor sound quality.
Hold the disc only on the edge or center hole.
f When not in use, take the disc out of the player,
put the disc back into its case and store it
away from dust, heat, damp and direct sun-
light.
Leaving the disc on the dashboard in the sun
can damage the disc.
f If the disc gets dirty, clean the disc by wiping
the surfaces from the center to the outside in
a radial direction with a soft cloth.
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
anti-static record preservative.
Disc cleaners are available in audio stores.
Car Telephone and
Aftermarket Alarms
Important legal and safety information
regarding the use of cellular telephones
Some states may prohibit the use of cellular tele-
phones while driving a vehicle. Check the laws and
regulations on the use of cellular telephones in the
areas where you drive.
Danger!
Severe personal injury or death can result in
the event of an accident.
Looking away from the road or turning your
attention away from your driving can cause
an accident and serious or fatal injury.
When using your cellular telephone, you should al-
ways:
f Give full attention to your driving - pull off the
road and park before making or answering a
call if traffic conditions so require; and
f Keep both hands on the steering wheel - use
hands-free operation (if available) - pull off the
road and park before using a hand-held tele-
phone.
It is essential to observe the instructions of
the telephone manufacturer before putting
the telephone into operation.
Any portable telephone or radio transmitter which
is used in a Porsche must be properly installed in
accordance with the technical requirements of
Porsche.
The transmission power must not exceed
10 W.
The devices must possess a type approval for
your vehicle and have an esymbol.
If you should require equipment with transmission
power values greater than 10 W, please consult
your authorized Porsche dealer for this purpose.
He is familiar with the technical requirements for
installing devices of this kind.
The antennas for all radios and telephones with a
transmitting antenna must be externally mounted.
The improper installation of radios or telephones
or use of a radio or telephone with a transmitting
antenna inside the car may cause the warning
lights to come on.
Improper installation of such equipment can cre-
ate a discharged battery or excessive current
draw from added equipment.
If aftermarket systems are installed by non-dealer-
ship technicians or outside the selling dealer,
problems may result. Installation of aftermarket
equipment is not covered under the New Car War-
ranty.
f Consult your authorized Porsche dealer about
the installation of non Porsche approved equip-
ment.
Reception quality
The reception quality of your car telephone will
change constantly when you are driving. Interfer-
ence caused by buildings, landscape and weather
is unavoidable. It may become particularly difficult
to hear when using the hands-free function due to
external noise such as engine and wind noise.
Automatic car-wash
f Unscrew external antennas before using an au-
tomatic car-wash.
Shifting Gears 163
Shifting Gears
Manual Transmission, Clutch...................... 164
Tiptronic S................................................ 165
164 Shifting Gears
Manual Transmission, Clutch
The positions of the gears are shown on the shift
diagram on the gearshift lever.
Warning!
Risk of accident.
f Do not obstruct the pedal travel with floor mats
or other objects.
Nonskid floor mats of the correct size are
available at your authorized Porsche dealer.
To avoid damage to the clutch and transmis-
sion:
f Always depress the clutch pedal fully when
changing gears. Make sure that the gearshift
lever is completely engaged.
f Only shift into reverse when the car has come
to a complete stop.
f When shifting gears, always ensure that the
clutch pedal is fully depressed and the gear
has fully engaged.
f Select reverse only when vehicle is stationary.
f Select an appropriately low gear on upward
and downward slopes.
This will ensure optimum use of engine power
and engine braking.
When reverse gear is selected and the ignition is
on, the backup lights are illuminated.
Permitted engine speed
f You should change into a higher gear before
the needle reaches the red mark on the ta-
chometer, or ease off the accelerator.
If the red zone is reached during acceleration, fuel
feed is interrupted.
Caution!
Risk of engine damage (overrevving) when
shifting down to a lower gear.
f Take care not to exceed the maximum permit-
ted engine speed when shifting down.
Shifting Gears 165
Tiptronic S
The Porsche Tiptronic is a five-speed transmission
with an automatic and a manual selection
mode.
In automatic selection mode (selector lever po-
sition D), gear changing is automatic.
You can change temporarily from automatic to
manual mode using the rocker switches on the
steering wheel.
In manual selection mode (selector lever posi-
tion M), you change gear using the rocker switch-
es on the steering wheel.
You can change between selector lever position D
and M as you wish while driving.
Note
Take care not to operate the rocker switches on
the steering wheel inadvertently in either automat-
ic or manual mode, thereby triggering undesired
gear changes.
Keylock position
The ignition key can be withdrawn only in selec-
tor lever position P.
Changing the selector lever position
The selector lever is locked with the ignition key
withdrawn.
The selector lever can be moved from position P
or N only with:
The ignition switched on
The brake pedal pressed and
The release button pressed
Release button
The release button (arrow) in the selector lever
prevents unintentional gear changes.
The release button must be pressed when shifting
to position R or P.
Starting
The engine can be started only if the brake pedal
is depressed and the selector lever is in position
P or N.
Moving off
f Only select the desired position for moving off
(D, M or R) when the engine is idling and the
brake pedal is depressed.
f Since the vehicle creeps when in gear, do not
release the brake until you want to move off.
f After selecting a gear, do not accelerate until
you can feel that the gear is engaged.
166 Shifting Gears
Indicator for selector lever position and
engaged gear
When the engine is running, the selector lever po-
sition and engaged gear are indicated.
If the selector lever is between two positions:
The corresponding selector lever position in
the instrument cluster flashes for two seconds
and
The warning Selector lever not engaged ap-
pears in the on-board computer.
f Engage the selector lever correctly.
The selector lever position is displayed imme-
diately after the correct position has been de-
tected.
The current gear is shown after a brief
detection period.
If there is a fault in the transmission:
The 4th gear display flashes.
The warning Tiptronic emergency run ap-
pears on the on-board computer.
Please observe the chapter REDUCED DRI-
VING PROGRAM on Page 170.
Porsche dealer.
Shifting Gears 167
Selector Lever Positions
P Parking lock
f Engage parking lock only when vehicle is sta-
tionary.
f Engage parking lock after applying the hand-
brake and release it before releasing the hand-
brake.
The ignition key can be withdrawn only in selec-
tor lever position P.
R Reverse gear
f Select only if car is stationary and the brake is
applied.
N Neutral
Selector lever position N must be selected for
towing or in car washes, for example.
f Only select the desired position for moving off
(D, M or R) when the engine is idling and the
D - Automatic selection mode
Select position D for normal driving. The gears
are shifted automatically according to the acceler-
ator position and speed.
Depending on the way the vehicle is driven and on
the resistance (e.g. uphill), the gear-changing
points are shifted towards higher or lower engine-
speed ranges.
The accelerator position, driving speed, engine
speed, longitudinal and lateral acceleration and
the road profile all have an influence on the gear-
changing characteristic.
Unwanted upward shifts, e.g. before bends, are
prevented by swiftly releasing the accelerator ped-
al.
Depending on lateral acceleration, upward chang-
es on bends are not made until the engine-speed
limit is reached.
Under braking, and depending on the amount of
deceleration, the Tiptronic changes down earlier.
For subsequent cornering, the right gear is en-
gaged when pressure is applied to the brakes be-
fore the bend. The bend is taken in the right gear,
and when you accelerate out of the bend you do
not have to shift down.
Sport mode switched on
f Please observe the chapter SPORT MODE on
Page 71.
If the Sport mode program is switched on,
Tiptronic switches to a sporty gear-changing map
and shortens the shifting periods.
Deceleration downshifts are commenced earlier.
Downshifts are already carried out in the case of
slight decelerations, even at higher engine
speeds.
Driving off
In 2ndgear, the vehicle moves off with the throt-
tle only slightly open.
Move off in 1st gear with the throttle open wider
or when the engine is cold.
168 Shifting Gears
Shifting gears on the steering wheel
With the rocker switches on the steering wheel,
you can change temporarily from automatic
selection mode D to manual mode M.
Example:
Shifting down before bends and on entering
built-up areas.
Shifting down on downward slopes
(engine braking).
Shifting down for brief spurts of acceleration.
Selecting 1st gear for starting off.
Manual selection mode remains engaged:
for cornering (depending on the lateral
acceleration) and overrunning,
when the vehicle is stationary
(e.g. at a junction).
The system leaves manual selection mode:
automatically after approx. 8 seconds
(unless cornering or overrunning),
if you depress the accelerator for kickdown,
after moving off.
Temporary change-down
Conditions:
Speed is higher than approx. 33 mph (54 km/ h).
f Rapid acceleration.
The Tiptronic temporarily changes to the
sportiest gear-changing map, i.e. to the high-
est possible gear-changing points.
Correspondingly, the transmission shifts down
immediately by one or two gears.
Ending the function:
f Release the accelerator markedly
(by approx. 25%).
Kickdown
The kickdown function is active in selector lever
position D, even if you temporarily change to man-
ual mode M using the rocker switches on the
steering wheel.
f For optimum acceleration, e.g. when overtak-
ing, depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
full-throttle point (kickdown).
The transmission shifts down depending on the
speed of travel and engine speed.
Upward shifts occur at the highest possible engine
speeds.
These gear-changing speeds remain active until
the accelerator is released to approx. 80%of the
full-throttle position.
M - Manual selection mode
The currently selected gear is retained when you
change from D to M.
If you change from M to D, the gear-changing map
suitable for your current driving style is selected
and the appropriate gear is chosen.
Warning!
The kickdown function is not active in manual
selection mode M.
f Therefore shift down manually when accelerat-
ing (e.g. to overtake).
Shifting Gears 169
Two rocker switches in the upper steering-wheel
spokes let you comfortably and reliably select the
five forward speeds.
Shifting up
f Press upper part (+) of a rocker switch.
Shifting down
f Press lower part () of a rocker switch.
Depending on driving speed and engine speed,
you can shift up or down at any time.
Gear changes which would exceed the upper or
lower engine-speed limit will not be executed by
the controller.
You can change down two gears by quickly press-
ing the rocker switches twice.
If the engine-speed limit is reached, an automatic
upward shift is performed or, just before idling
speed is reached, a downward shift is performed.
Select an appropriately low gear on upward and
downward slopes.
This will ensure optimum use of engine power and
engine braking.
PSM switched off and/ or Sport mode
switched on
f Please observe the chapter PORSCHE STABI-
LITY MANAGEMENT (PSM) on Page 72.
f Please observe the chapter SPORT MODE on
Page 71.
If the PSM is switched off and/ or Sport mode is
switched on, an automatic upshift does not occur
when the engine speed limit is reached.
Cancelling upshift suppression
This restriction can be cancelled for one gear
change by depressing the accelerator to kick-
down. If, for example, the engine speed limit is
reached during overtaking and the automatic up-
shift does not occur, the transmission in this case
shifts up by accelerating to kickdown.
f Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the full-
throttle point (kickdown).
Manual mode failure
If manual mode fails, the control electronics
switch to automatic mode. In this event, the instru-
ment cluster will display selector lever position D.
Porsche dealer.
170 Shifting Gears
Stopping
f For a brief stop (e.g. at a traffic light), leave the
selector lever in drive position and hold the ve-
hicle with the brake pedal.
f For a longer stop with the engine running, se-
lect position N (neutral) and hold vehicle in po-
sition with the foot brake.
Select lever position D only when the foot
f Do not hold the car on a slope using the
accelerator. Use the brake pedal or the hand-
brake instead.
f Before leaving the vehicle, always apply the
handbrake and move the selector lever to po-
sition P.
Parking
f Go easy on the accelerator!
f When parking or maneuvering in a small
space, control the speed by careful use of the
footbrake.
Driving in winter
In wintry road conditions it is advisable to take
steep inclines in manual mode. This prevents the
occurrence of gear changes that could cause
wheelspin.
Tow-starting, towing
f Please observe the chapter TOWING on
Page 281.
Reduced driving program
A transmission fault is indicated by the following
symptoms:
The 4thgear display on the instrument clus-
ter flashes.
The warning Tiptronic emergency run ap-
pears on the on-board computer.
The transmission no longer shifts.
Warning!
Reverse gear lock monitoring is disabled in
the emergency running program.
Damage to the vehicle may result as well as
loss of control, if the vehicle is moving for-
ward fast enough to cause rear wheel lockup.
f Do not shift into R while the vehicle is moving
forward.
Proceed as follows in the event of a transmission
fault:
1. Stop in a safe place.
2. Move selector lever to position P, switch the ig-
nition off and wait for 10 seconds.
3. Start the engine.
2ndgear in selector position D and reverse
gear R are now available.
4. Have the fault seen to immediately at an au-
Mobile Roofs 171
Mobile Roofs
Lifting/ Sliding Roof.................................... 172
Convertible Top......................................... 176
Emergency operation
of the convertible top................................ 178
Windstop.................................................. 185
Hardtop.................................................... 189
Roof Transport System.............................. 195
172 Mobile Roofs
Lifting/Sliding Roof
Warning!
Risk of injury when operating or automatical-
ly closing the lifting/ sliding roof.
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
when the lifting/ sliding roof is operated.
f Always withdraw the ignition key when leaving
the vehicle. Uninformed persons (e.g. children)
could injure themselves by operating the lift-
ing/ sliding roof.
f In case of danger, release the button immedi-
ately and operate the lifting/ sliding roof in the
opposite direction.
When the ignition is switched on (engine
switched on or off) or
With doors closed and ignition key withdrawn,
but only until a door is first opened.
A - Opening the lifting/sliding roof
f Press rear of rocker switch A until lifting/ slid-
ing roof reaches the desired position.
One-touch operation
f Touch rear of rocker switch A.
Lifting/ sliding roof opens to its end position.
Stop it in any position by touching any button.
Note
The lifting/ sliding roof opens until it reaches the
best position from the point of view of noise. It can
be opened fully, however, if you press the rocker
switch again.
Mobile Roofs 173
B - Closing the lifting/sliding roof
f Press front of rocker switch B until lifting/ slid-
One-touch operation
f Touch front of rocker switch B.
Lifting/ sliding roof closes to its end position.
Stop it in any position by touching any button.
C - Lifting the lifting/sliding roof
f Press center of rocker switch C until lifting/
sliding roof reaches the desired position.
One-touch operation
f Touch the rocker switch C in the center.
Lifting/ sliding roof opens to its end position.
Touch button again to stop in any position.
B - Lowering the lifting/sliding roof
f Press front of rocker switch B until lifting/ slid-
174 Mobile Roofs
Emergency operation
Warning!
Risk of serious personal injury and damage
to the lifting/ sliding roof during emergency
operation.
f Do not operate the lifting/ sliding roof with the
rocker switch during and after emergency
operation.
Before using emergency operation, please check
whether defective fuses are the cause of the mal-
function.
f Please observe the chapter ELECTRICAL SYS-
TEM on Page 254.
Closing the sliding roof
1. Carefully unclip both covers A with a screwdriv-
er.
If the car is equipped with HomeLink, the
HomeLink buttons must be carefully unclipped
instead of the covers.
2. Unscrew the two screws B.
3. Fold down the cover of the lifting/ sliding roof
drive at the rear.
Remove the Allen key (arrow) from its holder.
4. Insert the Allen key into the drive axle.
Mobile Roofs 175
5. Press the Allen key into the drive axle, keep it
pressed and turn it clockwise until the lifting/
sliding roof is closed.
6. Remove the Allen key.
Close the cover and screw in the screws.
7. Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the lifting/ sliding roof.
f After emergency operation, do not operate the
lifting/ sliding roof using the rocker switch.
f Drive slowly to an authorized Porsche dealer in
order to have the fault remedied.
176 Mobile Roofs
Convertible Top
Brief operating instructions can be found on the
back side of the drivers sun visor.
Warning!
When opening or closing the convertible top,
serious personal injury may occur if a per-
sons body parts are near or in the way of the
convertible top mechanisms moving parts.
f Make absolutely sure that nobody can be in-
jured by the convertible-top mechanism or the
convertible-top compartment lid.
Do not operate convertible top:
At temperatures below 32F (0C).
When one side of the car is on a curb, a hoist
or a jack.
When items of luggage or other objects hinder
the convertible top movement.
With the rollbars extended.
f Avoid frequent operation of the convertible top
with the engine off; the vehicle battery would
be unintentionally discharged rapidly.
f Drive only with the convertible top fully open or
closed (end positions).
f When opening or closing the convertible top,
ensure there is sufficient clearance above the
convertible top (e.g. in the garage).
f To prevent damp stains and abrasions, only
open the convertible top in a dry, clean state.
f Park your car in the shade whenever possible,
as the fabric, rubber material and color can be
harmed by long exposure to sunlight.
f The convertible top may only be actuated dur-
ing driving on even surfaces.
f The convertible top must not be used with
strong counter wind (over approx. 50 mph/
80 km/ h).
Door windows and side windows
The side windows are lowered automatically when
the convertible top is opened. The door windows
close automatically if convertible top operation is
not interrupted when the convertible top reaches
its final position.
When the door windows are closed, the rear side
windows can also be closed.
When opening the door windows, the rear win-
dows open automatically.
The side windows are lowered automatically when
the convertible top is closed. All windows close
automatically if convertible top operation is not in-
terrupted when the convertible top reaches its fi-
nal position.
Mobile Roofs 177
Preconditions for operation of the
convertible top
The ignition must be switched on
(engine running or off),
the engine compartment lid must be closed,
the speed must be below approx. 30 mph
(50 km/ h).
If this maximum speed is exceeded, the open-
ing/ closing procedure of the convertible top
will be interrupted.
Warning!
Risk of injury and damage when operating
the convertible top.
f Make absolutely sure that nobody can be in-
jured by the convertible-top mechanism or the
f Before opening the convertible top, make sure
that there are no objects behind the rear seats.
f Keep the lids of the make-up mirrors in the sun
visors closed when closing the convertible top.
f In order to abort convertible top operation in
the event of danger, immediately release the
rocker switch.
Opening convertible top
f Pull the rocker switch back and hold without in-
terruption until the convertible top is in the final
position or until the door windows are in the de-
sired position.
The message on the on-board computer goes
out.
In case of danger, release the rocker switch.
Convertible top operation stops.
Closing convertible top
f Push the rocker switch forward and hold
without interruption until the convertible top is
in the final position or until the door windows
are in the desired position.
The message on the on-board computer goes
out.
In case of danger, release the rocker switch.
Convertible top operation stops.
f f f
178 Mobile Roofs
If the convertible top does not lock in the
windshield frame
f Open convertible top again, start the engine
and close the convertible top again using the
rocker switch.
Assist with the closing process by grasping the
convertible top at the handhold and pulling it
toward the windshield frame (arrow).
Messages in on-board computer
If the engine compartment lid is open when acti-
vating the convertible top, a message appears in
the on-board computer. The convertible top can-
not be opened.
f Close engine compartment lid.
Emergency operation
of the convertible top
f Before performing emergency operation,
please check:
Was the ignition switched on and was the en-
gine compartment lid closed during operation
of the convertible top with the rocker switch?
Are electrical fuses defective?
Please observe the chapter ELECTRICAL SYS-
TEM on Page 254.
Warning!
There is danger of injury during emergency
operation.
There is danger of crushing or trapping body
parts at all movable convertible top parts
which could cause serious personal injury.
f Take great care when performing emergency
operation.
f Do not operate the convertible top during and
after emergency operation.
Before emergency operation
f Remove the ignition key so that the convertible
top is not operated unintentionally.
f Take screwdriver out of the tool kit.
f Fold the rear seat backrests forward.
Rear lid
Convertible top status
Mobile Roofs 179
Removing rear wall lining
1. Unscrew screws A from the rear wall lining.
Pull out and reposition the screwdriver insert if
necessary.
2. Grasp the rear wall lining at the cut-outs for the
safety belts and press downward.
Pull rear wall lining forward and lift up and out.
Opening convertible top compartment
lid D
1. Take red Allen key B out of its holder.
2. Put handle of screwdriver onto Allen key B.
Insert Allen key into the drive axle C and turn it
counterclockwise (in direction of the arrow) un-
til the convertible top compartment lid D is fully
open.
Remove the Allen key.
Warning!
The Allen key can rotate or fly out and there-
by cause serious personal injury if the con-
vertible top is actuated.
f Always remove the Allen key B from the drive
axle C before operating the convertible top.
When you have opened the convertible top com-
partment lid, try to close the convertible top using
the rocker switch.
If the convertible top cannot be closed, continue
with emergency operation.
f f f
180 Mobile Roofs
Opening side flaps F
1. Remove ignition key.
2. Use the screwdriver to remove plastic lid E
from the lining from behind.
3. Insert Allen key B into the drive axle for the left
side flap F.
Turn Allen key counterclockwise (in direction of
arrow) until the side flap F is fully open (percep-
tible stop).
4. Repeat procedure with the right side flap.
Remove the Allen key.
Warning!
The Allen key can rotate or fly out and there-
by cause serious personal injury if the con-
vertible top is actuated.
f Always remove the Allen key B from the drive
axle of the side flap before operating the con-
vertible top.
f When you have opened the side flaps, try to
close the convertible top using the rocker
switch.
If the convertible top cannot be closed, contin-
ue with emergency operation.
Mobile Roofs 181
Closing convertible top
1. Insert Allen key B through hole G and into the
hydraulic valve.
Turn Allen key B counterclockwise by approx.
1 revolution.
Always remove Allen key B.
2. Get behind the front seats and grasp the con-
vertible top in the middle.
3. Close the convertible top until it reaches its
highest position.
f f f
182 Mobile Roofs
The convertible top lock with the locking hook is
fitted on the convertible top.
Perform the work on the convertible top lock when
standing on the right-hand side of the vehicle.
Extending the locking hook H
1. Pull the plastic lid J down on the front corners.
Push the lid carefully to the rear and take it off.
2. Take the Allen key K out of the oddments tray
between the front seats.
3. Insert the Allen key K into the opening L and
turn in the direction of arrow openuntil
marked resistance can be felt.
The locking hook H is now extended.
4. Pull out the Allen key K.
Mobile Roofs 183
5. Pull the convertible top all the way forward to
the windshield.
Locking the locking hook Hin the
windscreen frame
f When locking the convertible top, make sure
that the locking hook engages in the
windshield frame. Pull the convertible top to
the windshield frame if necessary.
The centering journals M must be retracted
into the mounting in the windshield frame.
1. Insert the Allen key again.
Turn in the direction of arrow closeuntil you
can feel marked resistance and the convertible
top is completely locked.
2. Remove the Allen key.
Mounting the plastic lid
f Push the plastic lid over the convertible top
locking mechanism from behind.
The lid must engage centred in the guide N.
Push the lid upwards at its front edge and
engage.
Warning!
Risk of injury in an accident.
f Do not drive without the plastic lid mounted.
f f f
184 Mobile Roofs
Closing the convertible-top compartment lid
Warning!
Risk of pinching when closing the
f Place your hands on the convertible-top
compartment lid when pushing.
1. Stand behind the vehicle.
2. Grasp the convertible-top compartment lid
above the brake light and push forward against
resistance which can be felt until it is
completely closed.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the convertible top.
f After emergency operation, do not operate the
convertible top using the rocker switch.
f Drive slowly to an authorized Porsche dealer in
order to have the fault remedied.
Mobile Roofs 185
Example: Mount for 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S
Windstop
The windstop is stowed in a protective bag in the
The protective bag is fastened with a Velcro strip
in the luggage compartment.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the windstop
f Make sure that the windstop is not damaged
by items of luggage or objects in the luggage
compartment.
f Do not place any objects on the windstop.
f Do not store any sharp-edged objects under
the installed windstop.
f Do not damage the windstop during seat ad-
justment and when folding back the front-seat
backrests.
Adjust seat so that the seat backrest does not
touch the windstop.
f Do not fold up the rear seat backrests with the
windstop installed.
f Remove windstop before fitting a hardtop.
Installing the windstop
1. Open zipper of the protective bag.
Take the windstop out of the luggage compart-
ment.
f f f
186 Mobile Roofs
2. Fold the rear seat backrests forward.
Please observe the chapter REAR SEAT
BACKRESTS on Page 39.
3. Unfold the windstop until it can be felt to en-
gage in the hinges at the top and bottom.
4. Check whether the lock of the windstop lower
section is engaged.
Press lock together if necessary (arrows).
A - Lock open
B - Lock closed
5. Check whether the two red locking handles are
in position A (open).
Open the lock if necessary. To do this, push the
locking handles inward as far as they will go
and swivel to the side (arrow).
Mobile Roofs 187
6. Insert fastening tabs C of the windstop into the
guides of the safety belts.
Make sure that the plastic peg E engages in
the center guide of the windstop.
7. Push red locking handles inward and swivel
downward.
Spring force pushes the square pins of the
locks into the receivers D in the side trim pan-
els.
Check whether the square pins are correctly
engaged.
8. Lift upper section of windstop if required.
f f f
188 Mobile Roofs
A - Lock open
B - Lock closed
Removing the windstop
1. Fold back upper section of windstop.
2. Move both red locking handles to position A
(open).
3. Pull windstop out of the guides of the safety
belts.
4. Fold the windstop together so that the split
windstop lower section is on the outside.
5. Place windstop in the protective bag in the lug-
gage compartment and seal the zipper of the
protective bag.
Please observe the chapter INSTALLING THE
WINDSTOP on Page 185.
Mobile Roofs 189
Hardtop
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be glad to give
advice about correct hardtop storage.
Since the convertible top stays open for a long
time, it must be absolutely dry and clean before
being opened to install the hardtop.
This prevents damp stains and abrasion damage.
f Make sure that the hardtop is placed on a
clean, soft surface.
Removing the hardtop
1. Open all four side windows.
2. Pull off plastic cover of the front hardtop lock
(arrow).
3. Press red locking button A of the front locking
lever.
Fully open locking lever B.
f f f
190 Mobile Roofs
4. Take unlocking handle D from the storage tray
5. Position unlocking handle D on the dot mark-
ing.
Carefully remove the plastic covers C on both
sides of the hardtop.
6. Insert unlocking handle D into one of the rear
hardtop locks.
Unscrew the fastening screw approx. 2 turns,
pull off the handle, and completely unscrew the
screw by hand (approx. 8 turns).
7. Pull out the fastening screw up to the stop and
turn it anticlockwise 2 turns (to prevent dam-
age).
8. Repeat procedure on the other side of the
hardtop.
9. Together with a second person on the other
side, grasp the hardtop at points E and F.
Warning!
Danger of pinching fingers or hands at the
points F.
f Evenly lift the hardtop at both sides.
10.First pull the hardtop rearward and up out of
the locking elements.
Carefully lift the hardtop up and over the vehi-
cle to the rear.
Mobile Roofs 191
11.Carefully remove both protection covers J to
the rear.
12.Fit both plastic covers C into the trim panel.
The marking point must point to the rear.
These covers are also used with the hardtop.
13.Close front locking lever.
Push on plastic cover of the front hardtop lock.
Putting on the hardtop
Caution!
Risk of damage to the windstop and hardtop.
f Always remove the windstop before fitting the
hardtop.
Please observe the chapter WINDSTOP on
Page 185.
1. Open all four side windows and convertible
top.
2. Take unlocking handle D from the storage tray
Position unlocking D on the point marking.
Carefully remove both plastic covers C on both
sides of the hardtop.
3. Carefully fit both protective covers J into the
trim panel from behind.
f f f
192 Mobile Roofs
4. Pull off plastic cover of the front hardtop lock. 5. Press red lock button of the front locking lever.
Fully open locking lever.
Mobile Roofs 193
6. Check whether the rear screw connections on
the hardtop are loosened (turn it 2 turns clock-
wise).
7. Together with a second person on the other
side, grasp the hardtop at points E and F.
8. Carefully lift the hardtop up and over the vehi-
cle from behind.
Warning!
Danger of pinching fingers or hands at the
points F.
f Evenly lower the hardtop at both sides.
9. First push the hardtop completely into the
guides on the windshield frame.
Then carefully lower the hardtop into the lock-
ing elements at the rear.
Caution!
Danger of damage due to inadvertent opera-
tion of the convertible top with the hardtop
fitted.
f Make sure that the front locking lever G is al-
ways correctly locked.
This disables the convertible top drive.
f f f
194 Mobile Roofs
10.Swivel front locking lever G to the rear.
The latching hook H must engage in the wind-
shield frame (arrow).
The white marking line J on the red locking but-
ton must become visible when the hardtop is
locked properly.
11.Push on plastic cover of the front hardtop lock.
12.Tighten the fastening screw by hand.
Then tighten the fastening screw with the un-
locking handle D (tightening torque 34 ftlb.
(46 Nm)).
13.Repeat procedure on the other side of the
hardtop.
14.Fit both plastic covers C into the trim panels of
the rear hardtop locking elements so that the
marking points are opposite each other.
15.Store unlocking handle in storage tray
Mobile Roofs 195
Roof Transport System
(Coup only)
f Please follow the separate instructions for fit-
ting the Roof Transport System.
f Only use Roof Transport Systems from the
Porsche Tequipment product range or Roof
Transport Systems which have been tested
and approved for your car by Porsche.
Fitting normal commercially available luggage
racks is not possible.
The Porsche Roof Transport System allows you
to carry various sports and hobby equipment.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
tell you about the various different uses of the
Roof Transport System.
Safety notes!
f Completely remove the Roof Transport System
before using an automatic car wash risk of
damage to the vehicle!
f Do not exceed the maximum permitted pay-
load, the maximum permitted gross weight
and the maximum permitted axle loads.
Please observe the chapter WEIGHTS COU-
P on Page 292.
f Distribute load evenly, with heavy items as low
as possible.
Items of luggage must not project beyond the
side of the load area.
f Fix and secure every item to the basic carrier
with a rope or lashing strap (do not use elastic
rubber tensioners).
f Before every journey, and at regular intervals
during long trips, check that Roof Transport
System and load are secure. Re-tighten if nec-
essary and secure additionally by locking.
When the Roof Transport System is loaded, the
maximum speed depends on the nature, size and
weight of the load being carried.
Driving, braking and steering behavior change due
to the higher center of gravity and the greater
wind-resistant area. You should adapt your driving
style appropriately.
Since fuel consumption and noise are increased
with the Roof Transport System fitted, it should
not remain on the vehicle if not in use.
196 Mobile Roofs
Maintenance, Car Care 197
Maintenance, Car Care
Exercise Extreme Caution
when Working on your Vehicle.................... 198
Coolant Level............................................ 199
Engine Oil................................................. 201
Engine Oil Level ........................................ 201
Engine Oil Recommendation....................... 203
Brake Fluid Level....................................... 205
Fuel Economy........................................... 207
Operating Your Porsche in other Countries.. 207
Fuel Recommendations.............................. 209
Portable Fuel Containers............................ 210
Emission Control System........................... 211
How Emission Control Works ..................... 212
Fuel Evaporation Control............................ 213
Washer Fluid............................................. 213
Power Steering......................................... 214
Air Filter ................................................... 215
Combination Filter ..................................... 215
Manual Transmission Oil ............................ 215
Automatic Transmission Fluid..................... 215
Wiper Blades ............................................ 216
Car Care Instructions................................. 218
198 Maintenance, Car Care
Exercise Extreme Caution when
Working on your Vehicle
Danger!
Ignoring the following instructions may
cause serious personal injury or death.
f The engine compartment of any motor vehicle
is a potentially hazardous area. If you are not
fully familiar with proper repair procedures, do
not attempt the adjustments described on the
following pages.
This caution also applies to the entire vehicle.
f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well
ventilated area.
f Ensure that there are no open flames in the
area of your vehicle at any time when fuel
fumes might be present. Be especially cau-
tious of such devices such as hot water heat-
ers which ignite a flame intermittently.
down sufficiently. Hot engine compartment
f Be alert and cautious around engine at all
times while the engine is running.
If work has to be performed with the engine
running, always set the parking brake, and
make sure the shift lever is in neutral position
or the selector lever in position P.
f In particular, be very careful to ensure that
items of clothing (ties, shirt, sleeves etc.),
jewelry, long hair, hand or fingers cannot get
caught in the engine-compartment blower, fan,
belts or other moving parts.
The radiator and radiator fans are in the front
of the car.
The engine-compartment blower is mounted
on the engine-compartment lid.
The engine-compartment blower can start or
continue running as a function of temperature,
even with the engine switched off.
Carry out work in these areas only with the en-
gine off, the ignition switched off, and exercise
extreme caution.
f Your Porsche is equipped with an electronic ig-
nition system. When the ignition is on, high
voltage is present in all wires connected with
the ignition system; therefore, exercise ex-
treme caution when working on any part of the
engine while the ignition is on or the engine is
running.
f Always support your car with safety stands if it
is necessary to work under the car.
f When working under the car without safety
stands but with the wheels on the ground,
make sure the car is on level ground, the
wheels are blocked, and that the engine
cannot be started.
Remove the ignition key.
f Do not smoke or allow an open flame around
the battery or fuel.
Keep a fire extinguisher in close reach.
f Incomplete or improper servicing may cause
problems in the operation of the car. If in doubt
about any servicing, have it done by your
Improper maintenance during the warranty
period may affect your Porsche warranty cov-
erage.
f Supplies of fluids, e.g. engine oil, brake fluid or
coolant, are hazardous to your health.
Keep these fluids out of childrens reach and
dispose of them in accordance with the appro-
priate regulations.
f Some countries require additional tools and
special spare parts to be carried.
Please make enquiries before driving abroad.
Power measurements
Power measurements on dynamometers are not
approved by Porsche.
Coolant Level
f Please observe the chapter EXERCISE EXTRE-
ME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VE-
HICLE on Page 198.
The cooling system is filled at the factory with a
permanent coolant.
It provides year-round protection from corrosion
and freezing down to 31F/ 35C.
f Only use antifreeze authorized by Porsche.
Checking coolant level
The expansion tank with its filler orifice is in the en-
gine compartment.
f Check the coolant level regularly through the
transparent expansion tank.
When the engine is cold and the car is level the
fluid level must lie between the MIN and MAX
markings.
Topping off coolant
Warning!
Danger of serious personal injury from scald-
ing. Coolant is hazardous to your health, and
may be fatal if swallowed.
f Do not open the cap of the expansion tank
while the engine is hot.
f Allow the engine to cool down before opening
the cap and protect your hands, arms and face
from any possible escape of hot coolant.
f Keep coolant out of childrens reach.
f Also, keep coolant away from your pets.
They can be attracted to it should there be a
spill, or to used coolant left in an open contain-
er. Coolant can be deadly to pets if consumed.
1. Switch engine off and let it cool.
Please observe the chapter COOLING SYS-
TEM on Page 92.
2. Cover the expansion tank cap with a thick rag.
Open cap slowly and carefully and allow over-
pressure to escape.
Then unscrew cap completely.
3. Only add a mixture of antifreeze and water in
equal parts, and do not exceed the MAX
mark.
Antifreeze in coolant:
50%gives protection down to 31F/ 35C
60%gives protection down to 58F/ 50C
4. Screw cap firmly on.
If in an emergency pure water has been added, the
mix ratio must be corrected at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Marked loss of coolant indicates leakage in the
cooling system.
The cause should immediately be remedied at an
f f f
Engine-compartment blower,
radiator fan
The radiator and radiator fans are in the front of
the car.
The engine-compartment blower is mounted on
the engine compartment lid.
Warning!
Risk of injury.
After the engine is switched off, the engine-
compartment temperature is monitored for
approx. 30 minutes.
During this period, and depending on tem-
perature, the engine-compartment blower
may continue to run or start to run.
gine off, the ignition off, and exercise extreme
caution.
Risk of injury. The radiator fans in the front
end of the car may be operating or
unexpectedly start operating when the
engine is switched on.
gine switched off.
Engine Oil
Engine oil consumption
It is normal for your engine to consume oil.
The rate of oil consumption depends on the quality
and viscosity of oil, the speed at which the engine
is operated, the climate, road conditions as well
as the amount of dilution and oxidation of the
lubricant.
If the vehicle is used for repeated short trips, and
consumes a normal amount of oil, the engine oil
measurement may not show any drop in the oil
level at all, even after 600 miles (1,000 km) or
more. This is because the oil is gradually becom-
ing diluted with fuel or moisture, making it appear
that the oil level has not changed.
The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the
vehicle is driven at high speeds, as on an express-
way, making it then appear that oil is excessively
consumed after driving at high speeds.
If the conditions you drive your vehicle in are
dusty, humid, or hot, the frequency of the oil
change intervals should be greater.
If the vehicle is driven at a high rate of speed,
climatic conditions are warm, and the load is high,
the oil should be checked more frequently, as
driving conditions will determine the rate of oil
consumption.
The engine in your vehicle depends on oil to
lubricate and cool all of its moving parts.
Therefore, the engine oil should be checked
regularly and kept at the required level.
Make it a habit to have the engine oil level
checked at every fuel filling.
The oil pressure warning light is not an oil level
indicator.
The oil pressure warning light indicates serious
engine damage may be occuring when lit, if en-
gine rpm is above idle speed.
Engine Oil Level
HICLE on Page 198.
f Regularly check the oil level using the on-board
computer after the vehicle is refuelled.
Please observe the chapter OIL DISPLAY AND
on Page 118.
The difference between the minimum and maxi-
mum marks on the segment display is approx.
1.2 liters.
Each segment of the display corresponds to ap-
prox. 0.4 liter.
f f f
Topping off engine oil
Warning!
Risk of burning from hot parts in engine com-
partment. Risk of injury by rotating parts.
The engine compartment blower on the en-
gine compartment lid can start up even with
engine off.
f Exercise extrem caution when working in the
engine compartment.
f Top off engine oil only with the engine off.
Engine oil is hazardous to your health and
f Keep engine oil out of childrens reach.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals.
f Always protect your skin by washing thorough-
ly with soap and water.
1. The on-board computer indicates how much oil
must be added.
2. Pull oil filler tube upwards out of its holder.
3. Unscrew cap of the oil filler opening.
4. Add at most 0,5 quarts (0,5 liter) of engine oil
at a time.
5. Measure oil level again with the on-board
computer.
6. Add more engine oil if necessary.
Never add more engine oil than required
to reach the max. mark.
7. Carefully close cap of the oil filler opening.
8. Push oil filler tube into its holder until it snaps
into place.
Engine Oil Recommendation
Recommended oil viscosity ranges dependent on ambient temperatures
Use only engine oils approved by Porsche.
If in doubt ask your authorized Porsche dealer for Porsche tested and approved all-season oils.
Ambient temperature
seasonal
SAE Viscosity Range
engine oils
generally above 13F/ 25C SAE 0W-40, 5W-40, 5W-50
approved by Porsche
generally below 13F/ 25C SAE 0W-40 approved by Porsche
Oil change
The engine oil has to be changed at the intervals
listed in your Maintenance Schedule.
Page 291.
We recommend that you have the engine oil
changed at your Porsche dealer, who has the re-
quired oils and the necessary filling equipment.
If you suspect an oil leak in the engine have your
dealer check it out immediately.
All current engine oils are compatible with each
other, i. e. when making an oil change it is not nec-
essary to flush the engine if you wish to use a dif-
ferent brand or grade of oil.
Since, however, each brand of oil has a special
composition, you should, if possible, use the
same oil brand if it becomes necessary to top up
between oil changes.
Porsche engines have long intervals between oil
changes. You can make best use of these long oil
change intervals by using multigrade oils since
these are largely independent of seasonal fluctua-
tions in temperature.
If your vehicle is used frequently in stop-and-go
traffic in cold weather, the engine will not always
be properly warmed up.
Condensation from products of combustion may
accumulate in the oil. In this case, it is advisable
to change the oil more frequently so that your en-
gine once again has 100%efficient engine oil.
Engine oil performance class
Engine oil is not only a lubricant, but also serves
to keep the engine clean, to neutralize the dirt
which penetrates into the engine through combus-
tion and to protect the engine against corrosion.
To perform these functions, the oil is provided with
additives which have been specially developed for
these functions.
The efficiency of an oil is expressed, for example,
by the API, ILSAC or ACEA classifications.
Viscosity
Like all liquids, engine oil is viscous when cold,
and thin-bodied when warm. The viscosity of an oil
is expressed by its SAE class. For cold viscosity
(measured at temperatures below 32F/ 0C) the
SAE class is given as a number and the letter W
(as in winter), for hot viscosity (measured at
212F/ 100C) the SAE class is given only as a
number.
The viscosity of an oil is, therefore, always the
same if it has the same number of an SAE class.
Oils with two viscosities are called multigrade oils;
oils with only one viscosity are termed single-
grade oils.
Single-grade oils can not be used in your engine.
The viscosity of the engine oil for your Porsche
has to be chosen according to the ambient tem-
perature given in the engine oil recommendation
table.
Brake Fluid Level
HICLE on Page 198.
Use only new(unused) Original Porsche
brake fluid.
Warning!
Brake fluid is hazardous to your health, and
Brake fluid also attacks paintwork.
f Keep brake fluid out of childrens reach.
f Take care while topping off brake fluid not to
soil the luggage compartment or items of lug-
gage.
Example: 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S
Checking the brake fluid level
The reservoir for the hydraulic braking and clutch
systems is located in the luggage compartment.
1. Open and remove cover flap A.
2. Regularly check the brake-fluid level on the
transparent expansion tank through the
window B.
The fluid level should always lie between the
minimum and maximum marks.
A slight decrease in the fluid level due to wear and
automatic readjustment of the disc brakes is
normal.
If, however, the fluid level falls markedly or below
the minimum mark, the braking system may have
developed a leak.
f Have the brake system checked without delay
Changing the brake fluid
Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air over
time. This accumulation of water lowers the boil-
ing point and, under certain operating conditions,
can affect the braking action.
Therefore have the brake fluid changed in accord-
ance with the change intervals stated in the
brochure Maintenance.
The warning lights on the instrument panel and
on the on-board computer indicate an insuffi-
cient brake fluid level.
If the warning light lights up on the instrument
panel and the warning message appears on
the on-board computer in combination with a
larger pedal travel, a brake circuit may have
failed.
If the warning lights should light up whilst
driving:
f Stop immediately in a suitable place.
f Do not continue driving.
Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
Warning light USA
Fuel Economy
Fuel economy will vary depending on where,
when and howyou drive, optional equipment
installed, and the general condition of your
car.
A car tuned to specifications and correctly
maintained, will help you to achieve optimal
fuel economy.
f Have your vehicle tuned to specifications.
Air cleaner should be dirt free to allow proper
engine breathing.
Battery should be fully charged.
Wheels should be properly aligned.
Tires should be inflated at correct pressure.
f Always monitor your fuel consumption.
f Drive smoothly, avoid abrupt changes in speed
as much as possible.
f Avoid jack rabbit starts and sudden stops.
f Do not drive longer than necessary in the lower
gears. Shifting into a higher gear early without
lugging the engine will help save fuel.
f Prolonged warm up idling wastes gas. Start
the vehicle just before you are ready to drive.
Accelerate slowly and smoothly.
f Switch off the engine if stationary for longer
periods.
f Any additional weight carried in the vehicle re-
duces fuel economy. Always keep cargo to a
minimum and remove all unnecessary items.
f Organize your trips to take in several errands
in one trip.
f All electrical accessories contribute to in-
creased fuel consumption.
f Only switch on the air conditioning when neces-
sary.
f Do not drive with the Roof Transport System
mounted unless you need it.
The EPA estimated m.p.g. is to be used for
comparison purposes, actual mileage may
be different from the estimated m.p.g.,
depending on your driving speed, weather
conditions and trip length. Your actual
highway mileage will probably be less than
the estimated m.p.g.
f Please observe all local and national speed
limits.
Operating Your Porsche in other
Countries
Government regulations in the United States and
Canada require that automobiles meet specific
emission regulations and safety standards. There-
fore, cars built for the U.S. and Canada differ from
vehicles sold in other countries.
If you plan to take your Porsche outside the conti-
nental limits of the United States or Canada, there
is the possibility that
unleaded fuel may not be available;
unleaded fuel may have a considerably lower
octane rating. Excessive engine knock and se-
rious damage to both engine and catalytic con-
verters could result;
service may be inadequate due to lack of prop-
er service facilities, tools or diagnostic equip-
ment;
replacement parts may not be available or very
difficult to get.
Porsche cannot be responsible for the
mechanical damage that could result
because of inadequate fuel, service or parts
availability.
If you purchased your Porsche abroad and want to
bring it back home, be sure to find out about ship-
ping and forwarding requirements, as well as cur-
rent import and customs regulations.
Fuel
Warning!
Fuel is highly flammable and harmful to
health.
f Fire, open flame and smoking are prohibited
when handling fuel.
f Avoid contact with skin or clothing.
f Do not inhale fuel vapors.
To prevent damage to the emission control
system and engine:
f Never drive the tank completely out of fuel.
f Avoid high cornering speeds after the warning
lights have come on.
Please observe the chapter FUEL ECONOMY
on Page 207.
Please observe the chapter LEVEL GAUGE
on Page 94.
Check engine warning light
board computer come on and remain on while
driving, it suggests:
an improperly fastened tank cap or
refuelling with engine running.
Opening the filler flap
The filler opening is under the filler flap in the front
right fender.
f With the vehicle unlocked, press on the front
part of the filler flap (arrow) to open the flap.
The filler flap is centrally locked along with the oth-
er locks.
If there is a defect in the automatic unlocking
system:
f Open the passenger door.
f Pull the ring in the right-hand door aperture
(arrow).
Refuelling
Fuel tank capacity is listed under Capacities.
Porsche does not recommend the use of fuel ad-
ditives.
Fuel is highly flammable and harmful to
health.
Page 291.
1. Important: Stop the engine and switch off the
ignition.
2. Slowly unscrew the tank cap.
Hang the tank cap on the plastic strap of the
filler flap.
3. Insert fuel-hose nozzle fully into the filler neck
with the handle of the fuel-hose nozzle facing
down.
4. Do not add further fuel once the correctly op-
erated automatic fuel-hose nozzle has
switched off.
Fuel could spray or could run over in warm
temperatures.
5. Replace the tank cap immediately after
refuelling and turn it until you hear it and feel it
engage.
If you lose the tank cap, you must replace it
only with an original part to reduce the
possibility of a fire in the event of a collision.
Note
The oil level is automatically measured during
refuelling.
f Please observe the chapter OIL DISPLAY AND
on Page 118.
Fuel Recommendations
Your Porsche is equipped with catalytic convert-
ers and must use UNLEADED FUEL ONLY.
Your engine is designed to provide optimum per-
formance and fuel economy using unleaded premi-
um fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON
(93 CLC or AKI). Porsche therefore recom-
mends the use of these fuels in your vehicle.
Porsche also recognizes that these fuels may not
always be available. Be assured that your vehicle
will operate properly on unleaded premium fuels
with octane numbers of at least 95 RON
(90 CLC or AKI), since the engines Electronic
Oktane knock control will adapt the ignition tim-
ing, if necessary.
The use of UNLEADED FUEL ONLY is critically
important to the life of the catalytic
converters. Deposits from leaded fuels will
ruin the converters and make it ineffective
as an emission control device.
Cars with catalytic converters have a smaller fuel
tank opening, and gas station pumps have smaller
nozzles. This will prevent accidental pumping of
leaded fuel into cars with catalytic converters.
Unleaded fuels may not be available outside the
continental U.S. and Canada. Therefore, we rec-
ommend you do not take your car to areas or
countries where unleaded fuel may not be availa-
ble.
Octane ratings
Octane rating indicates a fuels ability to resist det-
onation. Therefore, buying the correct octane gas
is important to prevent engine damage.
The RON octane rating is based on the research
method. The CLC (U.S. Cost of Living Council oc-
tane rating) or AKI (antiknock index) octane rating
usually displayed on U.S. fuel pumps is calculated
as research octane number plus motor octane
number, divided by 2, that is written as:
The CLC or AKI octane rating is usually lower than
the RON rating:
For example: 95 RON equals 90 CLC or AKI
Fuels containing alcohol and ether
Some areas of the U.S. require oxygenated fuels
during certain portions of the year. Oxygenated fu-
els are fuels which contain alcohols (such as meth-
anol or ethanol) or ether (such as MTBE).
Under normal conditions, the amount of these
compounds in the fuel will not affect driveability.
You may use oxygenated fuels in your Porsche,
provided the octane requirements for your vehicle
are met. We recommend, however, to change to a
different fuel or station if any of the following prob-
lems occur with your vehicle:
Deterioration of driveability and performance.
Substantially reduced fuel economy.
Vapor lock and non-start problems, especially
at high altitude or at high temperature.
Engine malfunction or stalling.
Fuels containing MMT
Some North American fuels contain an octane en-
hancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
If such fuels are used, your emission control sys-
tem performance may be negatively affected.
The check engine warning light on your instrument
panel may turn on.
If this occurs, Porsche recommends you stop us-
ing fuels containing MMT.
Portable Fuel Containers
Danger!
Portable fuel containers, full or partially
empty, may leak causing an explosion, or re-
sult in fire in case of an accident.
f Never carry additional fuel in portable contain-
ers in your vehicle.
RON+MON
2
R+M
2
or
Emission Control System
In the interest of clean air
Pollution of our environment has become a prob-
lem that is of increasing concern to all of us. We
urge you to join us in our efforts for cleaner air in
controlling the pollutants emitted from the auto-
mobile.
Porsche has developed an emission control sys-
tem that controls or reduces those parts of the
emission that can be harmful to our environment.
Your Porsche is equipped with such a system.
Porsche warrants the Emission Control System in
your new car under the terms and conditions set
forth in the Warranty Booklet.
You, as the owner of the vehicle, have the
responsibility to provide regular maintenance serv-
ice for the vehicle and to keep a record of all main-
tenance work performed. To facilitate record
keeping, have the service performed by author-
ized Porsche dealers. They have Porsche trained
technicians and special tools to provide fast and
efficient service.
To assure efficient operation of the Emission
Control System:
f Have your vehicle maintained properly and in
accordance with the recommendations de-
scribed in your Maintenance Booklet.
Lack of proper maintenance, as well as im-
proper use of the vehicle, will impair the func-
tion of the emission control system and could
lead to damage.
f Do not alter or remove any component of the
emission control system.
f Do not alter or remove any device, such as
heat shields, switches, ignition wires, valves,
etc., which are designed to protect your vehi-
cles emission control system.
In addition to serious engine damage, this can
result in a fire if excess raw fuel reaches the
exhaust system.
f Do not continue to operate your vehicle if you
detect engine misfire or other unusual operat-
ing conditions.
Parking
Warning!
Danger of fire.
contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or oth-
er flammable material.
f If your car catches on fire for any reason, call
the fire department.
Do not endanger your life by attempting to put
out the fire.
Undercoating
Danger!
Danger of fire and serious personal injuries
or death.
f Do not apply additional undercoating or rust-
proofing on or near the exhaust manifold,
exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat
shields. During driving the substance used for
undercoating could overheat and ignite.
How Emission Control Works
When an automobile engine is running, it uses en-
ergy generated through the combustion of a mix-
ture of air and fuel. Depending on whether a car is
driven fast or slowly or whether the engine is cold
or hot, some of the fuel (hydrocarbons) may not
be burned completely, but may be discharged into
the engine crankcase or exhaust system. Additon-
al hydrocarbons may enter the atmosphere
through evaporation of fuel from the fuel tank.
These hydrocarbons (HC), when released into the
air, contribute to undesirable pollution.
In addition, carbon monoxide (CO) and oxides of
nitrogen (NOx) contribute to engine emissions.
They, too, are formed during the combustion proc-
ess and discharged into the exhaust system.
To reduce these pollutants, your Porsche is
equipped with a precisely calibrated fuel injection
system to assure a finely balanced air/ fuel mixture
under all operating conditions.
Oxygen sensor
The oxygen sensor, installed in the exhaust pipe
continuously senses the oxygen content of the
exhaust and signals the information to an electron-
ic control unit. The control unit corrects the air/
fuel ratio, so the engine always receives an accu-
rately metered air/ fuel mixture.
Crankcase ventilation
Through crankcase ventilation, undesirable emis-
sions from the engine crankcase are not permit-
ted to reach the outside atmosphere. These emis-
sions are recirculated from the crankcase to the
air intake system. From here the emissions mix
with the intake air and are later burned in the en-
gine.
Catalytic converters
The catalytic converters are efficient clean-up
devices built into the exhaust system of the vehi-
cle. The catalytic converters burn the undesirable
pollutants in the exhaust gas before it is released
into the atmosphere.
The exclusive use of unleaded fuel is critical-
ly important for the life of the catalytic con-
verters. Therefore, only unleaded fuel must
be used.
The catalytic converters will be damaged by:
push or tow starting the vehicle
misfiring of the engine
turning off the ignition while the vehicle is mov-
ing or
driving until the fuel tank is completely empty
by other unusual operating conditions.
f Do not continue to operate your vehicle under
these conditions, since raw fuel might reach
the catalytic converters. This could result in
overheating of the converters. Federal law pro-
hibits use of leaded fuel in this car.
Fuel Evaporation Control
Fuel tank venting
The evaporation chamber and the carbon canister
prevent fuel from escaping to the atmosphere at
extreme high outside temperatures, when driving
abruptly around curves and when the car is parked
at an incline or in any other nonlevel position.
Vapor control systemand storage
When the fuel tank is filled, vapors are collected in
the evaporation chamber by a vent line leading the
vapors to the carbon canister where they are
stored as long as the engine does not run.
Purge system
When the engine is running, the fuel vapors from
the canister will be mixed with fresh air from the
ambient air of the canister. This mixture will be
directed to the intake air housing by the tank vent
line, mixed with the intake air and burned during
normal combustion.
Washer Fluid
The reservoir, with a blue screw cap, is in the lug-
gage compartment, to the rear left.
Capacity
Without headlight cleaning system:
approximately 2.6 quarts (2.5 liters).
With headlight cleaning system:
approximately 6.3 quarts (6.0 liters).
Topping off washer fluid
Clean water is generally not enough to clean the
windshield and headlights.
Depending on the season, mix the water with win-
ter cleaner giving antifreeze protection or a sum-
mer cleaner. Follow the instructions for the mixing
ratio.
f Only use cleaner fluids authorized by Porsche.
1. Please note all the information on the refill con-
tainer of the cleaning agent.
2. Open cap of the washer-fluid reservoir.
3. Top up washer fluid and close cap properly.
f Do not use engine coolant anti-freeze or any
other solution that can damage the cars paint,
in the washer reservoir.
If less than 0.52 quarts (0.5 liter) remains, a
warning message appears on the on-board
computer.
f Add washer fluid.
Warning light
Power Steering
Power steering is assisted by hydraulic auxiliary
forces.
The hydraulic fluid reservoir is located in the en-
gine compartment.
Note
The flow noise heard at full steering lock is design-
related and does not indicate a defect in the steer-
ing system.
Warning!
Risk of accident.
When the engine is stopped (e.g. when being
towed) or the hydraulic system fails, there is
no assistance for steering.
Therefore, substantially more force will have
to be exerted in order to steer.
f Exercise great care when being towed.
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest author-
Checking hydraulic fluid
HICLE on Page 198.
f Only use hydraulic fluid authorized by Porsche.
Specification:
Please observe the chapter CAPACITIES on
Page 291.
Check the fluid level with the engine stopped and
cold (approximately 68F/ 20C).
1. Open the engine compartment lid.
2. Open the reservoir cap.
3. Wipe measuring rod.
Close cap and reopen. The fluid level should lie
in the area below the Cold marking.
Add hydraulic fluid if necessary.
4. Close cap carefully.
Close engine compartment lid.
Noticeable loss of fluid indicates leakage in the
system.
The cause should be remedied immediately at an
Air Filter
A dirty air filter not only reduces engine perform-
ance, but can lead to premature engine wear.
Regular filter replacement is part of the routine
maintenance service.
f In dusty conditions, check the filter element
more frequently and replace if necessary.
Combination Filter
The fresh air passing through the combination fil-
ter into the passenger compartment is virtually
free of dust, pollen, and unpleasant odors.
f If the outside air is polluted by exhaust fumes,
press the circulating-air button.
A dirty filter can be the cause of reduced air flow:
f Have filter replaced by your authorized
Porsche dealer.
Regular filter replacement is part of the routine
maintenance service.
Manual Transmission Oil
The transmission oil has to be checked and
changed at the intervals listed in your Maintenance
Schedule.
Page 291.
We recommend that you have the transmission oil
changed at your Porsche dealer, who has the re-
quired lubricants and the necessary filling equip-
ment.
If you suspect an oil leak in the transmission, have
your authorized Porsche dealer check it out imme-
diately.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
The torque converter and the transmission are lu-
bricated with Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF).
The final drive requires transmission oil. See Ca-
pacities.
Do not tow the car or run the engine without ATF
in the transmission. The automatic transmission
may be damaged by even a tiny speck of dirt, only
a clean funnel or spout must be used when adding
ATF.
The ATF and transmission oil has to be checked
and changed at the intervals listed in your Mainte-
nance Schedule.
We recommend that you have the ATF and trans-
mission oil changed at your Porsche dealer, who
has the required lubricants and the necessary fill-
ing equipment.
If you suspect an oil leak in the transmission, have
your authorized Porsche dealer check it out imme-
diately.
Wiper Blades
f When wiper performance deteriorates, replace
the wipers.
Caution!
Risk of damage if the wiper arm accidentally
falls back on to the window.
f Always hold the wiper arm securely when re-
placing the wiper blade.
Risk of damage if wiper blades that are fro-
zen in place are loosened improperly.
f Thaw the wiper blades before loosening them.
Maintenance note
If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this can be as a
result of the following:
If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car
wash, residues may adhere to the windshield.
These residues can only be removed using a
special cleaning solution.
Please contact your authorized Porsche dealer
for further information.
The wiper blades may be damaged.
f Replace damaged wiper blades as soon as
possible.
Changing windshield wiper blades
Caution!
Risk of damage.
If a wiper blade is not changed properly, it
can come loose when the car is moving.
f Check whether the wiper blade is seated
securely.
The wiper blade must engage the wiper arm
properly.
A- Passengers side, curved wiper blade
B- Drivers side, wiper blade with spoiler
1. Apply the handbrake.
2. Switch the wipers off (position 0) and remove
the ignition key.
3. Fold windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
4. Press together the plastic spring of the wiper
blade (right arrow).
Pull wiper blade out of wiper arm.
5. Insert new wiper blade until you feel it engage.
Ensure that the new wiper blade is inserted
into the wiper arm in the same position:
direction of the spoiler on the driver side,
curvature on the passenger side.
6. Carefully fold wiper arm back onto the wind-
shield.
Changing rear window wiper blade
Caution!
Risk of damage.
If a wiper blade is not changed properly, it
can come loose when the car is moving.
f Check whether the wiper blade is seated
securely.
The wiper blade must engage the wiper arm
properly.
f Apply the handbrake.
f Switch the rear wiper off (position 0) and
remove the ignition key.
f Fold wiper arm away from the glass.
blade.
2. Pull wiper blade upwards and out of wiper arm.
3. Insert new wiper blade into the wiper arm from
above.
blade and engage it in the wiper arm until it
snaps into place.
5. Carefully fold wiper arm back onto the window.
Car Care Instructions
HICLE on Page 198.
Regular and correct care helps to maintain
the value of your car and is also a
precondition for the NewVehicle Warranty
and the Anti Corrosion Warranty.
Your authorized Porsche dealer has specially
developed car-care products from the
Porsche program available either singly or
as complete car-care sets. They will be
pleased to help you select suitable products.
Whether you use Porsche products or other
commercially available cleaning agents first
make sure of their correct application.
A Porsche that is well-cared for can look like new
for years. It all depends on the amount of care the
owner is willing to give the car.
Warning!
Risk of serious personal injury or damage to
the vehicle or property.
Cleaning agents may be hazardous to your
health.
Most chemical cleaners are concentrates
which require dilution. High concentrations
might cause problems ranging from irritation
to serious injury as well as damage to your
vehicle.
f Keep cleaning agents out of reach from chil-
dren.
f Observe all caution labels.
f Always read directions on the container before
using any product. These directions may con-
tain information necessary to avoid personal
injury.
f Do not use fuel, kerosene, naphtha, nail polish
remover or other volatile cleaning fluids. They
may be toxic, flammable or hazardous in other
ways. Only use spot removing fluids in a well
vented area.
f Do not clean the underside of chassis, fend-
ers, wheel covers, etc., without protecting
your hands and arms as you may cut yourself
on sharp-edged metal parts.
Moisture and road salt on brakes may affect brak-
ing efficiency.
f Test the brakes after each vehicle washing.
Washing
The best method of protecting your car from the
damaging effects of the environment is frequent
washing and the application of a preservative. The
underside of your vehicle should also be thorough-
ly washed for cinders, salt or sanding at winters
end.
The longer salt, road dust and industrial dust,
dead insects, bird droppings or substances from
trees (resin, pollen) are allowed to remain on the
bodywork, the more serious is their harmful ef-
fect.
New cars should be washed carefully with plenty
of clear water to protect the new paint work. Dark
paint finishes show up the smallest of surface
damage (e.g., scratches) more readily than lighter
colors.
Dark colors are also more susceptible to scratch-
ing because of the composition of their pigments
and require particularly careful paint care.
f Do not wash your car in bright sunlight or while
the bodywork is still hot.
f When washing by hand, use abundant water, a
soft sponge or wash brush, and Porsche car
shampoo.
f Begin by spraying the body thoroughly with wa-
ter to rinse away loose dirt.
f After washing, rinse the car with plenty of wa-
ter and then dry with a chamois leather.
Do not use the same chamois leather for dry-
ing as you use for cleaning the windshield and
windows.
Warning!
Moisture which gets on to the brakes during
a car wash can reduce braking efficiency or
make the brakes pull unevenly which could
increase the danger of an accident, causing
serious personal injuries or death.
f Always apply the brakes a few times after
washing the car to test braking efficiency and
dry the brake discs.
When doing this, take care not to hamper other
road users behind you (traffic conditions per-
mitting).
Convertible top
f Never remove snow and ice using a sharp
edged object.
Incorrect care and treatment can damage the con-
vertible top and cause leaks. Any repair work can
be done by your authorized Porsche dealer.
Important note
No folding top is 100% leak proof.
Due to the constant changing of loads and strains
to which a car is subject to when driving on roads,
minor wind noise and seepage at joints between
the top, body and doors on convertible tops can-
not be completely sealed in certain areas. There-
fore small leaks are considered normal for these
models. In addition, your convertible top should
not be washed in a car wash. The top may experi-
ence damage by the brushes or may experience
leaks due to the high pressure water streams di-
rected in areas which would not encounter water
in normal driving conditions.
Cleaning
Caution!
Risk of damage due to the cleaning jet of the
high-pressure cleaning equipment or hot wax
treatment.
f Do not clean the convertible top with high-
pressure cleaning equipment.
f Do not use the hot wax treatment.
Do not wash the convertible top each time the car
is washed.
It is usually sufficient to spray or wash it with clean
water.
f Brush dust off the convertible top in the direc-
tion of the weave using a soft brush.
f Only if there is heavy dirt, wet the convertible
top with lukewarm water and the Porsche
Wash-Shampoo & convertible-top cleaner, us-
ing a sponge or soft brush, and rub gently.
Rinse Wash-Shampoo & convertible-top clean-
er thoroughly off the convertible top with clean
water.
f After washing it, treat the convertible-top cover
at least once a year with the special Porsche
convertible-top care product.
Do not allow the convertible-top care product
to come into contact with paint or windows. If
it does, remove immediately.
f If there is leakage in the convertible-top cover
or at its seams or folds, the special Porsche
convertible-top care product can be used.
f Please note the information on the container.
f Remove bird droppings immediately since the
acid in them will make the rubber swell and the
convertible top will become leaky.
f Open convertible top only when it is completely
dry, otherwise damp stains and scrub marks
may occur which cannot be removed.
f Try to remove spots from the convertible-top
cover by rubbing carefully with a soft rubber
sponge.
Automatic car washes
Optional add-on parts or parts which project
beyond the contours of the vehicle may be
damaged by design features (e.g. brushes) of au-
tomatic car washes.
The following parts are particularly
susceptible to damage:
Convertible top (hot wax treatment cannot be
used, as the wax attacks the convertible top
material)
Windshield wipers (always switch them off to
prevent them wiping unintentionally in intermit-
tent or sensor operation)
External antennas (always unscrew)
Roof Transport System (always remove com-
pletely)
Rear spoiler
Wheels (the wider the rim and the lower the tire
height, the greater the risk of damage)
High-gloss wheels (to prevent these from get-
ting scratched, do not clean with the wheel-
cleaning brushes of the car wash).
f Please consult the operator before using auto-
matic car washes.
f Wash and dry by hand all points not reached by
a car wash, such as door and lid seams or
door sills.
Note
Automatic car washes spray water at odd angles
and high pressures, which are not seen in normal
driving. Therefore, water can sometimes find its
way into the passengers compartment during or
shortly after the car wash.
Door lock
f To prevent the door lock from freezing during
the cold season, the lock cylinder should be
covered during a wash.
f Should the lock freeze, use an ordinary de-icer.
In many cases, a well warmed key can help.
Never use excessive force.
Paint
f Never rub a dusty car with a dry cloth since
dust particles are abrasive and could dull and
damage the surface finish.
The paintwork of your car is exposed to all types
of mechanical and chemical conditions, particular-
ly climatic ones such as bright sunlight, rain, frost
and snow. Ultraviolet light, rapid changes in tem-
perature, rain, snow, industrial dust and chemical
deposits constantly attack the paint which is only
able to withstand such exposure in the long term
if it is given regular care and attention.
f Do not apply silicone polishes to the windshield
or windows.
f Do not treat matt-painted components with
preservatives or polishes as this will spoil the
matte effect.
Preservation
The paint surface becomes dull over time due to
weathering. It is therefore necessary to preserve
the paint regularly.
This keeps the paint shiny and elastic. Dirt is pre-
vented from adhering to the paint surface and in-
dustrial dust is prevented from penetrating the
paint.
Provided it is washed and treated with preserva-
tive regularly, the brand new finish of your car will
be retained for years to come.
f Apply paint preservative after the car wash and
polish it dry to obtain a bright finish.
Polishing
Do not resort to using Porsche polish until it be-
comes evident that the normal preservatives no
longer produce the desired finish.
Spots and stains
f Remove tar stains, grease, oil spots and dead
insects as soon as possible with Insect Remov-
er. They can cause discoloration if allowed to
remain on the paintwork.
f Wash the affected area immediately after treat-
ing it.
Minor paint damage
f Have minor paint damage, such as scratches,
scores or chips caused by flying stones, re-
paired immediately by your authorized
Porsche dealer before corrosion sets in.
However, if there are already traces of corrosion,
they must first be removed carefully and thorough-
ly. Coat the area with a rust-proofing primer and
finish off with a top coat. The paint code and color
number are found on the data bank in the Mainte-
nance booklet.
Engine compartment
The engine compartment and the surface of the
engine are treated with a corrosion-inhibitor at the
factory.
If degreasing solvents are used to clean the en-
gine compartment or the engine is washed down,
the process almost invariably removes the corro-
sion-inhibiting coating. It is then absolutely neces-
sary to have a durable preservative applied to all
surfaces, body seams, joints and assemblies in
the engine compartment. This also applies when
corrosion-inhibitor parts are replaced.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the alternator.
f Do not point the cleaning jet directly at the al-
ternator, or cover the alternator.
Effective corrosion-proofing is particularly impor-
tant during the cold weather season. If your car is
driven frequently in areas where salt has been
spread on the roads, the whole engine compart-
ment should be cleaned thoroughly after the win-
ter to prevent salt from causing any lasting dam-
age. A full under-body wash should also be per-
formed at the same time.
Windows
The road dust which settles on the windshield and
windows contains particles of tire rubber and oil
residue. The interior trim and upholstery release
particles, particularly in strong sunlight, which col-
lect on the insides of the windows. These deposits
are augmented by impurities in the air which en-
ters the car through the fresh air vents.
f Clean all windows regularly, inside and outside,
with Porsche window cleaner.
f If you use a chamois leather for the windows,
do not use it for paintwork as it will otherwise
pick up a certain amount of preservative or
polish and could smear the windows and thus
impair vision.
f Remove dead insects with Porsche insect re-
mover.
Note
Door windows feature a water-repellent (hydro-
phobic) coating which prevents soiling of the
windows.
This coating is subject to natural wear and can be
renewed.
f Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
Wiper blades
Wiper blades that are in perfect condition are vital
for a clear view.
f Replace the wiper blades twice per year (be-
fore and after the cold season) or whenever
wiper performance deteriorates.
f Periodically clean the wiper blades with
Porsche window cleaner, especially after the
vehicle has been washed in a car wash.
If they are very dirty (e.g. with insect remains),
they can be cleaned with a sponge or cloth.
Undercoating
As it is not possible to exclude the risk of damage
to this protective coating in day to day driving, it
is advisable to have the underside of the car in-
spected at certain intervals preferably before
the start of winter and again in spring and the un-
dercoating restored as necessary.
Your authorized Porsche dealer is familiar with the
bodyseal treatment procedures and has the nec-
essary equipment for applying factory approved
materials. We recommend that you entrust them
with such work and inspections.
Unlike conventional spray oils, undercoating and
rust-proofing compounds based on bitumen or
wax do not attack the sound-proofing materials ap-
plied at the factory.
Warning!
Danger of fire and serious personal injuries.
f Do not apply additional undercoating or rust-
proofing on or near the exhaust manifold, ex-
haust pipes, catalytic converters or heat
shields. During driving the substance used for
undercoating could overheat and ignite.
f Before applying fresh underseal, carefully re-
move any deposits or dirt and grease. Once it
has dried, the new undercoating compound
forms a tough protective coating which pro-
vides efficient rust-proofing of the floor panels
and components.
f Always apply a fresh coating of suitable pre-
servative to unprotected areas after cleaning
the underside of the body, the transmission,
the engine or carrying out repairs to under-
body, engine or transmission components.
Effective rust-proofing is particularly important
during the cold weather season. If your car is driv-
en frequently in areas where salt has been spread
on the roads, the whole engine compartment
should be cleaned thoroughly after the winter to
prevent salt from causing any lasting damage. A
full under-body wash should also be performed at
the same time.
Light alloy wheels
f Please observe the chapter WASHING on
Page 219.
Warning!
Danger of accident if cleaning agents (e.g.
wheel cleaning agents) come into contact
with the brake discs. The resulting film on the
brake discs can impair braking perform-
ance.
f Make sure that no cleaning agent comes into
contact with the brake discs.
f If cleaning agent has come into contact with
the brake discs, thoroughly clean the brake
discs with a strong jet of water.
f Paying attention to any road users behind you,
dry the brake discs by applying the brakes at
short intervals.
Pitting may occur if metallic particles which cause
contact corrosion (e.g. brass or copper in brake
dust) are allowed to remain on the aluminum for
too long.
f If possible, wash the wheels with a sponge or
wash brush about every two weeks. In areas
where salt is spread on winter roads or there is
a lot of airborne industrial dust, it is best to
clean the wheels weekly.
The Porsche Light Alloy Wheel Cleaner
(ph-value 9.5) can be used for this pur-
pose.
If the ph-value of the detergent is incor-
rect, the protective coating on the wheels
will be destroyed.
Polishes which dissolve oxides, such as those
frequently used for other metals, or abrasive
tools or agents are unsuitable because they
break down the oxide film of the protective
coating and will cause discoloration of the
wheel.
f Every three months, after cleaning, coat the
wheels with a car wax or non-corrosive grease
(vaseline).
Using a clean cloth thoroughly rub the grease
into the surface.
Door, roof, lid and window seals
f Wash dirt (e.g. abrasion, dust, road salts) from
all seals regularly using warm soapy water. Do
not use any chemical cleaning agents or sol-
vents.
When there is a frost hazard, the outer door seals
and the front and rear lid seals can be protected
against freezing into place by a suitable care prod-
uct.
In order to prevent damage to the anti-
friction coating, the inner door seals, the
convertible top seals and hardtop seals must
not be treated with care products.
Headlights, lights, interior and exterior
plastic parts
f Use only clean water and a little dishwashing
detergent to clean light lenses, plastic head-
light lenses, plastic parts and surfaces.
Do not clean when dry.
Use a soft sponge or a soft, lint-free cloth. Gen-
tly wipe the surface without applying too much
pressure.
The Porsche inside window cleaner is also suit-
able for cleaning plastic surfaces. Follow the
cleaning instructions on the container.
Never use other chemical cleaners or
solvents.
f Rinse cleaned surfaces with clear water.
Leather
Characteristics and special features
The natural surface markings of leather, e.g.
creases, healed scars, insect sting marks, struc-
tural differences and slight variations in shade and
grain add to the attractiveness of the natural leath-
er product.
A special mention must be made here of natural
leather.
For natural leather, carefully selected hides of the
highest quality are used. It is not covered com-
pletely with dye on production.
Natures signature is therefore easily recogniza-
ble.
This fine material is distinguished by an outstand-
ing seating comfort, special suppleness and a typ-
ical patina.
Leather care and treatment
f Clean all types of leather regularly to remove
fine dust using a soft, damp, white woollen
cloth or a commercially available microfibre
cloth.
f Remove heavy contamination with Porsche
leather cleaner.
Please always follow the instructions for use
given on the containers.
Caustic cleaners and hard cleaning objects
must not be used.
Perforated leather must under no circum-
stances get wet on its reverse side.
Once cleaned, leather (particularly the heavily
stressed leather seats) must be treated only with
Porsche leather care liquid.
Fabric, upholstery, carpets and
floor-mats
f Use only a vacuum cleaner or a medium stiff
brush.
f Remove stains and spots with Porsche stain
remover.
The Porsche range of accessories includes non-
skid floor-mats to protect the carpets in summer
and winter.
Warning!
f Always check the movement of the pedals be-
fore driving and make sure that they are not ob-
structed by a floor-mat or any other object.
f Secure the floor-mat to prevent it from sliding
operation of your vehicle - do not install them
loosely in the vehicle.
nonskid floor-mats of the correct size.
Alcantara
f Do not use a leather care product to clean
Alcantara.
For regular care it is sufficient to clean the cover
with a soft brush.
Heavy abrasion or rubbing when cleaning causes
a lasting change in the surface.
Cleaning when lightly soiled
f Wet a soft cloth with water or a neutral soap
solution and wipe off the dirt.
Cleaning when heavily soiled
f Wet a soft cloth with lukewarm water or
thinned white spirit and dab the dirt from the
outside in.
Safety belts
If it becomes necessary to clean the belts, you
can use any mild washing agent.
Allow the belts to dry prior to retracting, but avoid
direct sunlight.
f Only use suitable cleaners.
If unsuitable cleaners are used or any attempt
is made to dye or bleach the belts, the web-
bing may be weakened and thus constitute a
safety risk.
Storing your Porsche
If you intend to store your Porsche for a prolonged
period, please consult your authorized Porsche
dealer. The staff will be glad to advise you on the
most suitable and necessary methods.
f Clean your vehicle thoroughly inside and out-
side.
Clean the engine compartment.
The under carriage and chassis components
should be free of dirt and salt deposits.
f Fill up the fuel tank.
f Change the oil and oil filter, and run the engine
for several minutes.
f Increase the tire pressure to 58 psi (4 bar).
It is not recommended to lift the vehicle, due to
the possibility of corrosion on shock absorber
piston shafts.
The vehicle should be moved slightly, approxi-
mately every four weeks, to prevent flat spot
on the tires.
Climate control
The air conditioning system should be in good
working condition and fully charged.
Windshield/ Headlight washer
f Check and correct antifreeze/ cleaning solution
level as necessary.
Electrical system
f Remove the battery from the vehicle and store
it in a cool dry place, not on a cement floor.
When the battery is disconnected, the
alarm system is deactivated.
f Recharge the battery every 3 months. If the
battery remains in the vehicle with the cables
connected, it is necessary to check, remove
and recharge the battery every 2-3 weeks.
Do not fast charge the battery.
f Please observe the chapter BATTERY on
Page 258.
Vehicle interior
The interior must be dry, especially in the area of
the floor carpets. The use of drying agents (Silica-
Gel) is recommended in vehicles with leather inte-
rior and in areas with high humidity. The recom-
mended amount is 3 fabric bags of 1.1 lbs.
(500 grams) each placed on the floor carpets.
Windows, doors and lids must be closed. The air
vents should be opened.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 227
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Exercise Extreme Caution
when Working on your Vehicle.................... 228
Tires/ Wheels ............................................ 229
Loading Information................................... 242
Lifting the Vehicle with a Lifting Platform
or Garage Lift ........................................... 244
Flat Tire.................................................... 245
Wheel Bolts .............................................. 248
Spacers ................................................... 249
Changing a wheel...................................... 250
Electrical System...................................... 254
Battery..................................................... 258
Emergency Starting with J umper Cables..... 264
Lights, Replacing Bulbs.............................. 266
Headlights................................................ 268
Tail Light .................................................. 276
License Plate Light.................................... 277
Luggage Compartment/
Engine Compartment/ Footwell Light........... 277
Door Guard/ Curb Light.............................. 277
Interior Light, Reading Lights...................... 278
Adjusting Headlights.................................. 279
Towing..................................................... 281
228 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Exercise Extreme Caution when
Working on your Vehicle
Danger!
Ignoring the following instructions may
cause serious personal injury or death.
f The engine compartment of any motor vehicle
is a potentially hazardous area. If you are not
fully familiar with proper repair procedures, do
not attempt the adjustments described on the
following pages.
This caution also applies to the entire vehicle.
f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well
ventilated area.
f Ensure that there are no open flames in the
area of your vehicle at any time when fuel
fumes might be present. Be especially cau-
tious of such devices such as hot water heat-
ers which ignite a flame intermittently.
down sufficiently. Hot engine compartment
f Be alert and cautious around engine at all
times while the engine is running.
If work has to be performed with the engine
running, always set the parking brake, and
make sure the shift lever is in neutral position
or the selector lever in position P.
f In particular, be very careful to ensure that
items of clothing (ties, shirt, sleeves etc.), jew-
elry, long hair, hand or fingers cannot get
caught in the engine-compartment blower, fan,
belts or other moving parts.
The radiator and radiator fans are in the front
of the car.
The engine-compartment blower is mounted
on the engine-compartment lid.
The engine-compartment blower can start or
continue running as a function of temperature,
even with the engine switched off.
Carry out work in these areas only with the en-
gine off, the ignition switched off, and exercise
extreme caution.
f Your Porsche is equipped with an electronic ig-
nition system. When the ignition is on, high volt-
age is present in all wires connected with the
ignition system; therefore, exercise extreme
caution when working on any part of the engine
while the ignition is on or the engine is running.
f Always support your car with safety stands if it
is necessary to work under the car.
f When working under the car without safety
stands but with the wheels on the ground,
make sure the car is on level ground, the
wheels are blocked, and that the engine
cannot be started.
Remove the ignition key.
f Do not smoke or allow an open flame around
the battery or fuel.
Keep a fire extinguisher in close reach.
f Incomplete or improper servicing may cause
problems in the operation of the car. If in doubt
about any servicing, have it done by your au-
Improper maintenance during the warranty pe-
riod may affect your Porsche warranty cover-
age.
f Supplies of fluids, e.g. engine oil, brake fluid or
coolant, are hazardous to your health.
Keep these fluids out of childrens reach and
dispose of them in accordance with the appro-
priate regulations.
f Some countries require additional tools and
special spare parts to be carried.
Please make enquiries before driving abroad.
Tires/Wheels
The original equipment tires and wheel rims on
your Porsche comply with all applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
For your safety remember the following:
Wheel rims and wheel bolts are matched to fit
your Porsche.
If you intend to use other than original equip-
ment wheels, be sure that they conform to
Porsche specifications for your model.
Only tires with the same make and with the
same specification code (e.g. N0, N1...)
can be mounted.
The use of wheel rims and wheel bolts that do
not meet specifications of the original factory
installed equipment will affect the safe opera-
tion of your vehicle.
Before you plan on exchanging wheels, or
snow tires already mounted on the wheel rims,
consult your authorized Porsche dealer. Your
dealer has the technical information necessary
to advise you which wheel rims and wheel bolts
are compatible with the original factory instal-
lations.
Danger!
Risk of loss of control and serious personal
injury or death.
f If while driving, your vehicle experiences a sud-
den vibration or ride disturbance, and/ or you
suspect that possible damage to your tires or
vehicle has occurred, you should immediately
reduce your speed without excessive use of
the brakes.
f Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and in-
spect the tires.
If you cannot determine the cause for the dis-
turbance, have your vehicle towed to the near-
est Porsche or tire dealer to have your vehicle
or tire(s) inspected.
f Continuing to operate the vehicle without cor-
rection could result in a loss of control and
serious personal injury.
UniformTire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and max-
imum section width.
Example
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested un-
der controlled conditions on a specific govern-
ment test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and a half (1-1/ 2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to var-
iations in driving habits, service practices and dif-
ferences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C and they represent the tires ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under con-
trolled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
Warning!
The traction grade assigned to this is based on
braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and does
not include cornering (turned) traction, accelera-
tion, hydroplaning or peak traction characteris-
tics.
Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tires resistance to the gener-
ation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperatures can cause the mate-
rial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perform-
ance which all passenger car tires must meet un-
der the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of per-
formance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning!
The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overload-
ed.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Tire pressures
Warning!
Incorrect tire pressure causes increased tire
wear and adversely affects road handling.
f Always use an accurate tire pressure gauge
when checking inflation pressures.
f Do not exceed the maximum tire pressure list-
ed on the tire sidewall.
Please observe the chapter TIRE PRESSURE
PLATE on Page 285.
f Cold tire inflation pressure means: all tires
must be cold, ambient temperature maximum
(68F/ 20C), when adjusting the inflation pres-
sure.
Avoid sunlight striking the tires before measur-
ing cold pressures, since the pressures would
rise from temperature influence.
f Valve caps protect the valve from dust and dirt,
and thus from leakage.
Always screw caps tightly down.
Replace missing caps immediately.
f Use only plastic valve caps.
f Do not use commercially available sealant or
tire inflating bottles. Only use Porsche
approved tire sealant.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked every 2 weeks when cold (68F/ 20C)
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommend-
ed in this Owner's Manual or on the tire-pressure
plate.
If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated in this Owner's Manual or on the tire-
pressure plate, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring (TPC)
that illuminates a low tire pressure message when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-in-
flated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
message illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly un-
der-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduc-
es fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicles handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPC is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers re-
sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trig-
ger illumination of the TPC low tire pressure mes-
sage.
f On vehicles with tire pressure monitoring:
Please observe the chapter TPC TIRE
PRESSURE MONITORING on Page 109.
When tires are warm, the tire pressure is
increased.
f Never let air out of hot tires.
This could cause the tire pressure to fall below
the prescribed value.
Insufficient tire filling pressure can cause tires to
overheat and thus be damaged even invisibly.
Hidden tire damage is not eliminated by subse-
quently correcting the tire pressure.
Overloading
Danger!
Risk of personal injury, loss of control and
damage to vehicle parts.
f Do not overload your vehicle. Be careful about
the roof load.
f If loading the vehicle also correct the tire pres-
sure. Tire pressure for loaded vehicle can be
found on the tire pressure plate and in the
chapter technical data.
f Never exceed the specified axle load.
Overloading can shorten the service life of the
tires and car, as well as lead to dangerous ve-
hicle reactions and long braking distances.
Damage due to overloading is not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
f Please observe the chapter LOADING INFOR-
MATION on Page 242.
f Please observe the chapter TIRE PRESSURES
Example of a tire pressure plate A
Tire pressure plate
Depending on when your vehicle was manufac-
tured, the tire pressure plate on the driver's door
aperture will contain different data.
Information on the tire pressure plate A
A Seating capacity
Maximum number of vehicle occupants, includ-
ing the driver.
B Vehicle load limit
Is the maximum total weight limit specified of
the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehi-
cle. This is the maximum weight of passengers
and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle.
If a trailer is being towed, the trailer tongue
weight must be included as part of the cargo
load.
Please observe the chapter LOADING INFOR-
MATION on Page 242.
C Tire size for the front axle
Check with your authorized Porsche dealer
about the current release status.
D Recommended tire pressure for the front axle
These values are for cold tires (68F/ 20C).
E Tire size for the rear axle
Check with your authorized Porsche dealer
about the current release status.
F Recommended tire pressure for the rear axle
These values are for cold tires (68F/ 20C).
G In vehicles with collapsible spare wheel:
Size and tire pressure of the spare wheel
Example of a tire pressure plate B
Information on the tire pressure plate B
A Information for tire sealant, seating capacity,
vehicle load limit
B Approved tire size for the front axle
C Permissible tire pressure for the front axle
D Tire pressure for fully loaded or partially
loaded vehicle
E Permissible tire pressure for the rear axle
F Approved tire size for the rear axle
Tire traction
Warning!
When driving on wet or slushy roads, a
wedge of water may build up between the
tires and the road. This phenomenon is
known as hydroplaneand may cause par-
tial or complete loss of traction, vehicle
control or stopping ability.
f Reduce speed on wet surface to prevent this.
Tire life
Tire life depends on various factors, i. e., road
surfaces, traffic and weather conditions, driving
habits, type of tires and tire care.
f Inspect your tires for wear and damage before
driving off. If you notice uneven or substantial
wear, wheels might need alignment or tires
should be balanced or replaced.
Tire wear
The original equipment tires on your Porsche have
built-in tire wear indicators. They are molded into
the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear as
approximately 1/ 2 in. (12 mm) bands when the
tire tread depth is down to 1/ 16 of an in.
(1.6 mm).
When the indicators appear in two or more adja-
cent grooves, it is time to replace the tires. We
recommend, however, that you do not let the tires
wear down to this extent.
Worn tires cannot grip the road surface properly
and are even less effective on wet roads.
In the United States, state laws may govern the
minimum tread depth permissible. Follow all such
laws.
Danger!
Driving on worn tires can result in loss of con-
trol of the vehicle and could cause serious
personal injuries or death.
f Do not drive with worn tires or tires showing
cuts or bruises as they may lead to sudden
deflation and loss of control which could cause
severe personal injury.
f Specialized high performance tires on high
performance sports cars exhibit more wear
than those on a family sedan, or even a high
performance sedan.
Therefore, it is important to check your tire
pressure and condition at least every two
weeks.
If you notice that tires are wearing unevenly, con-
sult your Porsche dealer.
Uneven wear may not always be due to improper
wheel alignment. It can be the result of individual
driving habits such as cornering at high speeds. If
the tire pressure is not checked and adjusted
regularly, abnormal tire wear can also occur.
Tire care
f Avoid damaging tires and wheel rims.
f If you must drive over a curb or other obstacle,
drive slowly and at an obtuse angle.
f Check tires for uneven wear and damage
before driving off.
f Remove imbedded material.
f Replace worn or damaged tires immediately.
f Keep oil, fuel, brake fluid, etc. away from tires.
f Replace missing valve stem caps.
f Keep tires inflated correctly.
f Wash tires when washing the vehicle. Also
clean inner side of wheels.
f Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
the wheels.
f Check wheel rims for corrosion.
f Remove road salt, if driving in winter.
Tire damage, puncture
f Check tires for imbedded material, cuts, punc-
tures, cracks and bulges (side wall) before driv-
ing off.
In case of tire damage, where it is uncertain wheth-
er there is a break in the ply with all its conse-
quences or tire damage caused by thermal or me-
chanical overloading due to loss of pressure or
any other prior damage, we recommend that the
tire be replaced for safety reasons.
If one faulty tire is replaced it should be noted that
the difference in tread depth on one axle must not
exceed 30%.
Handling inconsistencies may result.
f Perform a visual inspection if necessary.
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death.
Driving the vehicle with lowtire pressure
increases risk of a tire failure and resulting
loss of control. Furthermore, lowtire pres-
sure increases rate of wear of the affected
tires.
f Check tires including sidewalls regularly for
foreign bodies, nicks, cuts, cracks and bulges.
f After driving off road, examine tires for signs
of damage such as cuts, tears, bulges or for-
eign objects stuck in the tread. Replace a dam-
aged tire if necessary.
f Cross curb edges slowly and at right angles if
possible.
Avoid driving over steep or sharp curbs.
f In cases of doubt, have the wheel (particularly
the inner side) checked by an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Tire replacements
If in doubt, contact your Porsche dealer.
Use only tire makes and types approved by
Porsche.
If you do not use a Porsche recommended
replacement tire, make sure that you
purchase your newtires from a reputable tire
dealer and that the dealer complies with all
manufacturers warnings for those tires.
Only tires with the same make and with the
same specification code (e.g. N0, N1...)
can be mounted.
Before mounting newtires, check with your
Porsche dealer about the current release
status.
Use tires with ZRquality standards. There
are currently no standards concerning tire
strength at speeds above 150 mph (240 km/ h).
Tires should be replaced no less than on one axle
at the time.
Only tires of the same make and type must be
used. Mixed tires are not permissible.
Initially, new tires do not have their full traction.
You should therefore drive at moderate speeds
during the first 60 - 120 miles (100 - 200 km).
If new tires are installed only on one axle, a notice-
able change in handling occurs due to the different
tread depth of the other tires.
This happens especially if only rear tires are re-
placed. However, this condition disappears as the
new tires are broken in.
f Please adjust your driving style accordingly.
Installation of new tires should only be done by a
qualified tire technician.
Valves
Rubber valve stems must be replaced every time
a tire is replaced.
For metal valves, the installation and replacement
instructions must be observed.
f Use only genuine Porsche metal valves.
f Protect the valve inserts against soiling with
valve caps.
Soiled valve inserts can cause a gradual loss
of air.
f Use only plastic valve caps.
Parking at the curb
Warning!
Hard impacts against curbs (or traffic
islands) are dangerous and may cause hid-
den tire damage which is not noticeable until
later. Such damage can result in accidents at
high speeds causing severe personal injury.
Depending on the force of impact, the edge
of the rim can also be damaged.
f If you are in doubt, have the wheel checked by
an expert, particularly if you suspect damage
on the inside.
f If you must drive over a curb or other obstacle,
drive slowly and at an obtuse angle. Exercise
care when parking along curbs.
Wheel alignment, wheel balancing
As a precaution, have wheels with summer tires
balanced in the spring, and those with mud and
snow tires before winter.
Unbalanced wheels may affect car handling and
tire life.
Only the specified weights may be used for wheel
balancing.
Self-adhesive weights must not come into contact
with cleaning agents, since they could drop off.
Uneven tread wear indicates wheel imbalance. In
this event, the vehicle should be checked at an au-
Warning!
If, during a journey, uneven running or vibra-
tions occur that could be caused by damage
to tires or the car, the speed must be re-
duced immediately, but without braking
sharply.
If you continue your trip without having the
cause of the fault remedied, you might lose
control of your vehicle which could cause se-
vere personal injury.
f Stop the vehicle and check the tires.
f If no cause for the fault can be found, drive
carefully to the nearest authorized Porsche
dealer.
Removing and storing tires
f After changing, adjust tire pressure and torque
wheel bolts diagonally to 94 ftlb (130 Nm).
Tires must always remain on the same side of
the vehicle.
When wheels are removed, the direction of
rotation and position of each wheel should be
marked.
Example
FR (front right), FL, RR and RL.
Wheels must always be fitted in accordance with
their marking.
The preception that tire durability and perform-
ance are immune to the effects of storage and
age is unfounded.
Chemical additives, which make the rubber elas-
tic, lose their effectiveness in the course of time
and the rubber becomes brittle and cracks.
Therefore, the tires should be inspected from
time to time.
Note
Under no circumstances should tires older than 6
years be used on your Porsche.
The age of the tire can be obtained from the DOT
code number. If, for example, the last four num-
bers read 1204, then the tire was produced in the
12th week of 2004.
Store tires in a cool and dry place.
Snow tires
For a better grip on snow and ice, use radial M+S
tires with studs.
Check with your local Motor Vehicle Bureau for
possible restrictions.
Danger!
Risk of loss of control and damage to the
vehicle as well as serious personal injury or
death.
The standard tires profile and rubber mixture
are optimized for wet and dry driving condi-
tions, and may not prove favorable for snow
conditions.
f Therefore install M+S tires before driving in
such conditions.
Before mounting snowtires, consult with
your Porsche dealer. He has the technical
information necessary to advise you on
wheel and tire compatibility.
Snow tires should have the same load capacity as
original equipment tires and should be mounted on
all four wheels.
Snow tires with studs should be run at moderate
speeds when new in order to give the studs time
to settle.
Danger!
Tires with badly worn treads and studs are
very dangerous and could cause accidents
resulting in serious personal injuries or
death.
f Make sure they are replaced immediately.
f Do not drive a vehicle equipped with snow tires
at prolonged high speed.
Snow tires do not have the same degree of
traction on dry, wet or snowfree roads as a
normal tire.
Furthermore, snow tires wear rapidly under
these conditions.
Comply with all state and local laws
governing snowtire and tread depth require-
ments.
Danger!
Risk of accident and serious personal injury
or death due to excessive speed.
f Always check the maximum speed rating on
the tire sidewall on any tire on the vehicle.
f Never exceed the maximum speed rating of
the tires.
f Fit winter tires to both axles well before the
cold season begins.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased
to advise you.
Maintenance note
We recommend fitting winter tires on the vehicle at
temperatures below 45F (7C ).
Winter tires lose their traction capability when their
tread depth falls below 5/ 32 in. (4 mm).
Snow chains
Caution!
Risk of damage to body, axle or brake com-
ponents.
f Fit snow chains only to the rear wheels, and
only with the tire/ rim combination listed in the
Technical Data.
To ensure adequate clearance between chain
and body, Porsche recommends only the use
of fine-link chains such as those approved by
Porsche.
f Follow instructions issued by the supplier of
the chains.
Different states and countries have varying statu-
tory requirements regarding maximum speed.
Check with local authorities for possible restric-
tions.
f Remove chains as soon as the roads are free
of ice and snow.
911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S
Fitting snowchains
The use of snow chains is not permitted when
5 mm spacers are mounted.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the wheel housings if the
5 mm spacers are not removed before fitting
snowchains.
f To permit the fitting of snow chains, have the
5 mm spacers removed on all 4 wheels.
f To fit/ remove the spacers:
Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
f Please observe the chapter 5 MM SPACERS
on Page 253.
Tire designations
Due to new speed and load ratings for radial tires,
new designations have come into force for snow
tires for your Porsche.
The designation to be used for ZR tires is e.g.,
265/ 40 ZR 18 (Z = code letter for radial tires for
speeds above 150 mph / 240 km/ h).
Example of Inscription
Inscription on radial tire
A Tire size
Example: P 295/ 30 ZR 19 100 Y
P - The tire is designed for Passenger vehicle.
This information is not included on all tires.
295 - Indication of tire width in mm
30 - Indication of tire height to tire width ratio
in percent
ZR - code letter for radial tires for speeds
above 150 mph / 240 km/ h
There are currently no standards concerning
tire strength at speeds above 150 mph
(240 km/ h).
R - Belt type code letter for radial
19 - Indication of rim diameter in inches
100 - Load capacity coefficient
Y - Speed code letter
XL (Extra Load) - Tire with increased load rat-
ing
B TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Example: DOT xx xx xxxx xxxx
DOT
The DOT symbol indicates that the tires com-
ply with the requirements of the US Depart-
ment of Transportation and provides informa-
tion about:
first two-digit code means manufactures iden-
tification mark.
second two-digit code means tire size.
third four-digit code means tire type code.
fourth four-digit code means date of manufac-
ture.
If, for example, the last four numbers read
0204, the tire was produced in the 2nd week
of 2004.
C Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers in the tread and sidewalls
and their material composition.
D Maximum permissible inflation pressure
The maximum permissible cold inflation pressure
to which a tire can be inflated.
f Do not exceed the permissible inflation pres-
sure.
E Maximum Load rating
The maximum load in kilograms and pounds can
be carried by the tire. If you replace tires always
use a tire that has the same maximum load rating
as the factory installed tire.
F Radial
The identification indicates if the tire has radial
structure.
G Term of tubeless or tube tire
Identification for tubeless tires.
Speed code letter
The speed code letter indicates the maximum per-
missible speed for the tire.
This code letter is shown on the tire sidewall.
T = up to 118 mph (190 km/ h)
H = up to 131 mph (210 km/ h)
V = up to 150 mph (240 km/ h)
W= up to 167 mph (270 km/ h)
Y = up to 186 mph (300 km/ h)
Tip on driving
Tires with a maximum speed rating that is lower
than the specified maximum vehicle speed may be
mounted only if they bear an M+S identification on
the tire sidewall.
f Please note that in addition to the winter tires,
all-season and all-terrain tires are also subject
to speed limits and bear this identification.
Inscription on light alloy wheels
Maintenance note
f Protect the valve inserts against soiling with
valve caps.
Use only plastic valve caps.
Soiled valve inserts can cause a gradual loss
of air.
Note on operation
f The rim width in inches A and the rim offset F
are visible from the outside. This information
can be found near the tire valve.
A- Rimwidth in inches
B- Rim-flange contour code letter
C- Symbol for drop-center rim
D- Rimdiameter in inches
E - Double hump
F - Rimoffset in mm
Loading Information
Definitions
The Curb weight - actual weight of your vehicle -
vehicle weight including standard and optional
equipment, fluids and emergency tools. This
weight does not include passengers and cargo.
The Gross Vehicle Weight is sum of the curb
weight and the weight of passengers and cargo
combined.
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maxi-
mum total weight of vehicle, passengers, luggage
and optional equipment.
The Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum
load limit for the front or the rear axle. This infor-
mation is located on the safety compliance sticker
located in the drivers side door jamb.
For determining the compatibility of the tire and
vehicle load capabilities:
f Please observe the chapter TIRES, RIMS,
TRACKS 911 CARRERA, 911 CARRERA S on
Page 288.
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. 100) is a min-
imum requirement.
The Gross Combined Weight Rating is the
maximum total weight rating of vehicle, passen-
gers and cargo.
The Vehicle Capacity Weight - Load Limit - is
the maximum total weight limit specified of the
load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This
is the maximum weight of passengers and cargo
that can be loaded into the vehicle. This informa-
tion can be found on the tire pressure plate.
The maximum loaded vehicle weight is the
sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle ca-
pacity weight and production options weight.
The load rating is the maximum load that a tire
is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.
The maximum load rating is the load rating for
a tire at the maximum permissble inflation pres-
sure.
The cargo capacity is the permissible weight of
cargo, the substracted weight of passengers from
the load limit.
f Never exceed the permissible limits.
Danger!
Risk of personal injury, loss of control and
damage to vehicle.
f Never exceed the specified axle loads. Over-
loading can shorten the service life of the tires
and car, as well as lead to dangerous vehicle
reactions and long braking distances. Damage
due to overloading is not covered by the vehi-
cle warranty.
Example for determining the combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo
Vehicle Load Capacity
f The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed the weight shown on the
tire plate in the vehicle.
Please observe the chapter TIRE PRESSURE
PLATE on Page 285.
f Never exceed the number of passengers
shown on the tire pressure plate in the vehicle.
Determining the combined weight of
occupants and cargo:
f Add the weight of all occupants and then add
the total luggage weight (figure).
Steps for determining correct load limit
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
pounds" on your vehicles placard (depending
on the date of manufacture)
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your vehi-
cle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five - 150 lb passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 -
750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available car-
go and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
A-Front jacking point
Lifting the Vehicle with a Lifting
Platform or Garage Lift
The car must be raised only at the illustrated jack-
ing points.
B-Rear jacking point
Caution!
Serious injury and/ or serious damage to the
engine or the vehicle may occur, if you lift
the vehicle improperly.
f Never lift the vehicle at any other place than
the jacking points.
f Never lift the vehicle by the engine, transmis-
sion or axles.
f Do not damage any sensitive components in
the vicinity of the jacking points.
Platformlift
Before the car is driven on to a lifting platform, it
must be ensured that there is enough space be-
tween the lifting platform and the vehicle.
Garage lift
A garage lift must be used only at the illustrated
jacking points.
Flat Tire
Warning!
Failure to followthese instructions may result
in serious personal injuries to you or to by-
standers.
f If you have a flat tire, move a safe distance off
the road. Turn the emergency flasher on and
use other warning devices to alert other motor-
ists. Set the parking brake.
f Do not park your vehicle where it may contact
dry grass, brush or other flammable materials.
The hot parts of the exaust system could set
such materials on fire, thereby causing both
property damage and severe or fatal physical
injury.
A tire sealant and compressor with pressure
tester are located in the luggage compartment.
f Please observe the safety and operating in-
structions on the special sealant bottle with a
special Porsche part number and on the com-
pressor these are essential.
Important note
Sealing the tire with the tire repair kit is only
an emergency repair. Even with the tire air-
tight, it may be used only for short journeys
in an emergency.
The maximum permitted speed is 50 mph
(80 km/ h).
f Do not use commercially available sealant or
tire inflating bottles.
Use only the tire sealant located in the luggage
compartment.
Warning!
Risk of accident.
f Have tires replaced by a specialist workshop
as soon as possible.
f Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering
speeds.
f f f
A- Filler bottle
B- Filler hose
Tire sealant
The tire sealant can be used to seal small cuts,
especially in the tire tread.
Sealing the tire with the tire sealant is only an
emergency repair, so you can drive to the next
workshop. Even with the tire air-tight, it may be
used only for short journeys in an emergency.
The tire sealant and a compressor with pressure
tester can be found in the luggage compartment.
The tire sealant comprises:
A filler bottle
A filler hose
A valve turner and
A spare valve insert.
Danger!
Risk of accident.
f Use the tire sealant only in the case of cuts or
punctures no larger than 0.15 in. (4 mm).
f Never use the tire sealant if the rim is dam-
aged.
Warning!
The sealant is highly flammable and harmful
to health.
f Fire, naked flame and smoking are prohibited
when handling tire sealant.
f Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
f Keep tire sealant away from children.
f Do not inhale vapors.
In case of contact with the sealant:
f If sealant gets on the skin or in the eyes,
thoroughly rinse the affected part of the body
off without delay.
f Change soiled clothing immediately.
f Visit a doctor immediately in the event of an
allergic reaction.
f If sealant was swallowed, thoroughly rinse out
the mouth without delay and drink plenty of
water.
Do not induce vomiting.
See a doctor immediately.
A- Filler bottle
B- Filler hose
C- Plug of the filler hose
D- Valve turner
E - Valve insert
F - Tire valve
Inserting sealant
1.Leave the object that caused the puncture in
the tire.
2.Remove sealant and the enclosed sticker from
the luggage compartment.
3.Adhere the sticker in the driver's field of vision.
4.Shake filler bottle A.
5.Screw filler hose B onto the filler bottle.
The filler bottle is now open.
6.Unscrew valve cap from tire valve F.
7.Remove valve insert E from the tire valve with
valve turner D.
Keep the valve insert in a clean and dry place.
8.Remove plug C of the filler hose B.
9.Push filler hose onto the tire valve.
10.Hold filler bottle higher than the level of the tire
valve and press it together forcefully until the
bottle is completely emptied into the tire.
11.Pull filler hose off the tire valve.
12.Twist the valve insert firmly into the tire valve
using the valve turner.
13.Connect the compressor to the cigarette light-
er and inflate the tire to the prescribed tire
pressure.
Please observe the chapter TIRE PRESSURES
14.Screw valve cap onto the tire valve.
15.Check the tire pressure after driving for around
10 minutes.
If the tire pressure is less than 22 psi (1.5 bar),
do not continue driving.
If a value of more than 22 psi (1.5 bar) is indi-
cated, correct the pressure to the prescribed
value.
16.Please consult your authorized Porsche
dealer.
Care Instructions
After drying, any sealant that emerges can be
peeled off like a film.
Warning!
Risk of accident.
f Have the tire replaced by an authorized
Porsche dealer immediately.
f Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering
speeds.
f Do not exceed maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/ h).
f Please always observe the safety and oper-
ating instructions, which can be found in the
separate operating instructions for the sealant
and on the compressor.
Wheel Bolts
Warning!
Risk of wheel bolt breakage and wheel sepa-
ration, resulting in severe personal injury or
death.
f Follow all instructions concerning wheel bolts.
f Always clean the wheel bolts before fitting.
f Apply a thin coat of Optimoly TA (aluminium
paste) on the thread and between the bolt head
and movable spherical cap ring (arrows).
The bearing surface of the spherical cap
facing the wheel must not be greased.
f Replace damaged wheel bolts.
Only use the Original Porsche wheel bolts spe-
cially designed for this vehicle type.
Tightening torque
Tightening torque of wheel bolts:
130 Nm/ 96 ftlb.
Wheel Securing Bolts
The wrench socket for the wheel securing bolts is
in the tool pocket.
To loosen or tighten the wheel bolt with anti-theft
protection, a wrench socket with the appropriate
coding must be used between the wheel bolt and
the wheel-bolt spanner.
f When positioning the wrench socket, ensure
that it engages fully in the teeth of the wheel
bolt.
If the wheels have to be removed at the workshop,
please do not forget to hand over the wrench
socket for the wheel securing bolts along with the
car key.
Note on operation
On vehicles with 17 mm spacers on the rear axle,
the wheels are secured with wheel nuts.
On request, separate anti-theft protection for the
wheel nuts can be mounted.
Spacers
f Use the spacers only together with wheels and
fastening parts approved by Porsche.
Before having spacers fitted, find out about the
current approval status.
911 Carrera 4, 911 Carrera 4S
Danger!
Risk of accident.
17 mm spacers must only be mounted on the
rear axle together with 11.5 J x 19 (67 mm
rim offset) wheels.
f Always remove 17 mm spacers before
mounting other wheel sizes or an emergency
spare wheel because the wheel cannot be
mounted correctly.
Mounting an emergency spare wheel
If 5 mm spacers are mounted, these must not be
removed to mount an emergency spare wheel.
Fitting snowchains
Caution!
snowchains.
Note on operation
f To fit/ remove the spacers:
f Please observe the chapter 17 MM
SPACERS on Page 252.
Please observe the chapter 5 MM SPACERS
on Page 253.
Changing a wheel
Warning!
Risk of injury. The car may slip off the jack.
f Make sure that no one is in the vehicle when
jacking up and changing a wheel.
f Always place the car on stable supports if work
has to be carried out under the car.
Risk of damage to the brake discs of the
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB).
f Always screw in both assembly aids when
changing a wheel.
Note
The tools required for changing a wheel (e.g. jack,
wheel bolt wrench, assembly aids) are not sup-
plied with the car.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
advise you.
1. Fully apply the handbrake, engage 1st gear or
select position P and withdraw the ignition key.
2. Secure the car against rolling away, e.g. by
means of wedges under the wheels on the op-
posite side.
This is particularly important on slopes.
3. Slightly slacken the wheel bolts of the wheel to
be changed.
4. Raise the car until the wheel lifts off the
ground.
f Please observe the chapter LIFTING THE VE-
HICLE WITH A LIFTING PLATFORM OR GARAGE
LIFT on Page 244.
Screw in assembly aid for vehicles without Porsche
Ceramic Composite Brake
5. Remove 1 or 2 wheel bolts (see respective
illustration). Screw in assembly aids instead of
the wheel bolts.
Remove the remaining wheel bolts.
Note on operation
f To remove or mount the spacers:
Please observe the chapter 17 MM
SPACERS on Page 252.
Please observe the chapter 5 MM SPACERS
on Page 253.
Screw in two assembly aids for vehicles with Porsche
Ceramic Composite Brake
6. Take the wheel off and put a new wheel on.
7. Please observe the chapter WHEEL BOLTS
on Page 248.
Screw in wheel bolts; remove assembly aids
and screw in the remaining wheel bolts. Initially
tighten bolts in diagonally opposite sequence
so that the wheel is centered.
8. Lower the car completely.
9. Tighten wheel bolts in diagonally opposite
sequence.
Immediately after changing a wheel, use a
torque wrench to check the prescribed
tightening torque (130 Nm/ 96 ftlb.).
Checking tire pressure with a
pressure gauge
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge onto the valve stem.
Note on operation
f Do not press too hard or force the valve stem
sideways, or air will escape.
If the sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard, reposition the pressure gauge.
3. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and
compare it to the permissble tire pressure.
This information can be found on the tire pres-
sure plate or in the chapter Technical Data.
Please observe the chapter TIRE PRESSURES
4. Remove the pressure gauge.
f Please observe the chapter TPC TIRE PRES-
SURE MONITORING on Page 109.
17 mmspacers
911 Carrera 4, 911 Carrera 4S
Danger!
Risk of accident.
17 mm spacers must only be mounted on the
rear axle together with 11.5 J x 19 (67 mm
rim offset) wheels.
f Always remove 17 mm spacers before
mounting other wheel sizes or an emergency
spare wheel because the wheel cannot be
mounted correctly.
f For information on the spacers: Please
observe the chapter SPACERS on Page 249.
Removing the spacers
1. Unscrew the wheel bolts A with which the
spacer is fastened.
2. Remove the spacer.
3. Screw in 1 or 2 assembly aids instead of the
wheel bolts.
4. Fit wheel.
5. Please observe the chapter WHEEL BOLTS
on Page 248.
Insert wheel bolts A and tighten by hand.
Remove assembly aids, screw in remaining
wheel bolts.
Initially tighten bolts slightly in diagonally
opposite sequence so that the wheel is
centred.
6. Lower the car completely.
sequence.
Immediately after changing a wheel, use
a torque wrench to check the prescribed
tightening torque of the wheel bolts
(130 Nm/ 96 ftlb.).
f Store spacer and wheel nuts together.
Mounting the spacers
1. Remove wheel.
2. Fit the spacer with the wheel bolts A used to
fasten the wheel.
Initially tighten the wheel bolts slightly in
diagonally opposite sequence.
sequence.
Tightening torque: 130 Nm (96 ftlb.).
4. Fit wheel.
To do this use the original wheel nuts for
fastening the wheels.
f Please observe the chapter CHANGING A
WHEEL on Page 250.
On request, separate anti-theft protection for the
wheel nuts can be mounted.
f Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
5 mm spacers
Mounting an emergency spare wheel
If 5 mm spacers are mounted, these must not be
removed to mount an emergency spare wheel.
Fitting snow chains
Caution!
snow chains.
f To fit/remove the spacers:
Removing the spacers
1. Unscrew both countersunk screws (M6x16) on
the wheel hub.
2. Remove the spacer.
3. Fasten the brake disc with the short M6x12
countersunk screws, part No.:
900.269.047.09.
Tightening torque 10 Nm (7.5 ftlb.).
4. For wheel mounting without a spacer, 5 mm
shorter wheel bolts (part No.:
996.361.203.02) must be used.
f Please observe the chapter CHANGING A
WHEEL on Page 250.
Required scope of parts if the spacers are
removed
Short countersunk screws (M6x12)
Part No: 900.269.047.09
1 set short wheel bolts
Part No: 996.361.203.02
Short anti-theft protection
Part No: 996.361.057.01
f For information on the spacers: Please ob-
serve the chapter SPACERS on Page 249.
f f f
Long wheel bolt
X - bolt length approx. 50 mm
Arrows - marks
Wheel bolt identifying features
The long wheel bolts are identified on the face
surface of the bolt head with GT or in red, or the
moveable spherical cap ring is galvanised in red.
The long wheel bolts must only be used together
with 5 mm spacers fitted.
The short wheel bolts are not marked in colour.
The short wheel bolts must only be used without
5 mm spacers fitted.
Tightening torque for both wheel bolts:
130 Nm (96 ftlb.).
Electrical System
In order to avoid damage and faults in electrical or
electronic systems, electrical accessories should
be installed at your authorized Porsche dealer.
f Only use accessories authorized by Porsche.
Warning!
Risk of short circuit and fire.
Replacing fuses or relays with the engine
running or the ignition on could cause elec-
trical shock.
f Disconnect the battery during all work on the
electrical system.
Please observe the chapter BATTERY on
Page 258.
Relays
Defective relays should be changed only by an
authorized workshop.
In storage tray between the front seats
Sockets
Electrical accessories should preferably be
connected to the 12 V sockets.
f Please observe the maximum power
consumption.
Note on operation
The tire filling compressor must be connected to
the cigarette lighter.
In the passengers footwell
Note on operation
The sockets and thus the connected electrical
accessories function even if the ignition is
switched off or the ignition key is withdrawn.
If the engine is not running and the accessories
are switched on, the vehicle battery will be
discharged.
Do not operate additional accessories for more
than 5 minutes when engine is off.
Maximum power consumption for both
sockets together: 70 W.
f Please observe the power specifications from
the accessory manufacturer.
Alarm system, central locking
The status of the central locking and alarm system
is not changed by disconnecting the battery.
When the battery is disconnected, the alarm sys-
tem ceases to function.
Overload protection
If the central locking system is operated more
than ten times within a minute, further operation is
blocked for 30 seconds.
Load switch-off after 2 hours or 7 days
If the ignition key is removed, loads which are
switched on or are in standby mode (such as the
luggage compartment light, interior light and
radio) are automatically switched off after approx.
2 hours.
If the vehicle is not started or unlocked with the
remote control within 7 days, the remote control
standby function is switched off (to save the
vehicle battery).
1. In this case, unlock the driver's door with the
key at the door lock.
Leave the door closed in order to prevent the
alarm system from being triggered.
2. Press button 1 on the remote control.
The remote control is now activated again.
A - Diagnostic socket
Replacing fuses
In order to prevent damage to the electrical sys-
tem due to short circuits and overloads, the indi-
vidual circuits are protected by fuses.
The fuse box is located in the drivers footwell.
A - Plastic gripper
B - Spare fuses
1. Switch off the load with the defective fuse.
2. Pull off plastic cover at the finger hole (arrow).
The fuse plan and instructions for
emergency unlocking of the luggage
compartment lid can be found on the inner
side of the cover.
3. Remove the corresponding fuse from its slot
using the plastic gripper A in order to check it.
A blown fuse can be identified by the melted
metal strip.
4. Replace only with fuses of the same rating.
Note
f If a fuse blows repeatedly consult an author-
f Never try to repair fuses: you may cause se-
rious damage to other parts of the electrical
system.
Emergency unlocking of the luggage
compartment lid
If the battery is discharged, the lid can be opened
only with the aid of a donor battery.
Unlocking lid
1. Use the key to unlock the vehicle at the door
lock.
2. Remove plastic cover over the fuse box.
3. Pull out positive terminal A in the fuse box.
4. Use a jumper cable to connect the positive
terminal of the donor battery with positive
terminal A in the fuse box.
Note
If the vehicle was locked, the alarm horn will sound
when the negative cable is connected.
5. Use the second jumper cable to connect the
negative terminal of the donor battery with
latch striker B.
6. Unlock the luggage compartment lid with the
remote control.
The alarm system is switched off.
7. Disconnect the negative cable first, then the
positive cable.
8. Push the positive terminal A into the fuse box
and push on the plastic fuse box cover.
Note
The engine cannot be started with this method.
Page 264.
Battery
Warning!
Risk of short circuit and fire.
f Observe all warning notes on the battery.
f Disconnect the battery during all work on the
electrical system.
f Do not lay tools or other metal objects on the
battery as they could cause a short circuit
across the battery terminal.
Hydrogen gas generated by the battery
could cause an explosion, resulting in severe
personal injuries.
f Do not expose the battery to an open flame,
electrical spark or a lit cigarette.
f Do not wipe battery with a dry cloth.
Risk of severe personal injury and damage to
the fabric, metal or paint.
f Wear eye protection.
f Do not allow battery acid to come in contact
with your skin, eyes, fabric or painted surfac-
es.
f If you get electrolyte, which is an acid, in your
eyes or on your skin, immediately rinse with
cold water for several minutes and call a doc-
tor.
f Spilled electrolyte must be rinsed off at once
with a solution of baking soda and water to
neutralize the acid.
Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive harm.
f Always protect your skin by washing thorough-
ly with soap and water.
Risk of explosion as a result of static charge.
f Do not wipe the battery with a dry cloth.
f Eliminate potential electrostatic charge by
touching the vehicle before touching the bat-
tery.
Charge state
A well charged battery will not only prevent start-
ing problems but will also last longer.
In order to avoid discharging the battery
unintentionally:
f Switch off unnecessary electrical loads in city
traffic, on short trips or in a line or traffic.
f Always remove the ignition key from the igni-
tion switch when leaving the car.
f Avoid frequent operation of the convertible top
and operation of the Porsche Communication
Management system when the engine is not
running.
Battery care
f Ensure that battery is securely mounted.
f Keep terminals and connections clean and
properly tightened.
Corrosion can be prevented by coating the ter-
minals and connections with petroleum jelly or
silicone spray.
f Ensure that vent caps are securely tightened to
prevent spillage.
Checking the electrolyte fluid level
Generally, the electrolyte level must be checked
more often in summer than in the winter, and more
often when driving long distances.
f When adding water, use only clean containers.
In no case may alcohol (e.g. window cleaner
residues) be permitted to enter the battery.
f Unscrew and open the filler vent caps of each
cell.
With the car on a level surface, the fluid level
should meet the indicator mark in each cell.
f If necessary, top up with distilled water.
Do not use acid.
Only fill up to the mark, otherwise the electro-
lyte will overflow when the battery is being
charged and cause damage.
Battery charging
Automotive batteries loose their efficiency when
not in use.
The charge available in your battery can be meas-
ured with a battery hydrometer.
We recommend that the battery voltage be tested
by your Porsche dealer who has the appropriate
equipment.
If the car is not driven for prolonged periods, the
battery must be charged at least every 6 weeks.
A discharged battery allows rapid formation of sul-
fates, leading to premature deterioration of the
plates.
f f f
Warning!
Hydrogen gas generated by the battery
could cause an explosion, resulting in severe
personal injuries.
f Charge battery in a well ventilated area.
f Never charge a frozen battery. It may explode
because of gas trapped in the ice. Allow a fro-
zen battery to thaw out first.
f If you get electrolyte, which is an acid, in your
eyes or on your skin, immediately rinse with
cold water for several minutes and call a doc-
tor.
Slowbattery charging
1. Pay attention to all warnings and follow instruc-
tions that come with your battery charger.
2. When charging, ensure adequate ventilation.
3. Remove battery.
Please observe the chapter REMOVING THE
BATTERY on Page 262.
4. All vent caps should be open.
The fluid level should meet the indicator mark
in each cell.
5. Ensure that charger is switched off danger of
short circuit!
6. Connect charger cables.
Charger cables must be connected
POSITIVE (+) to POSITIVE (+) and
NEGATIVE () to NEGATIVE ().
7. Switch on charger.
Normally, a battery should be charged at no
more than 10 percent of its rated capacity.
Rated capacity of the battery in your vehicle is
listed on the battery housing.
8. After charging, turn off charger and disconnect
charger cables.
9. Tighten the vent caps and reinstall battery.
Please observe the chapter INSTALLING THE
BATTERY on Page 263.
Winter operation
The capacity and ability of the battery to store
power decreases at low outside temperatures.
Additionally, more power is consumed while start-
ing, and the headlights, heater, rear window de-
fogger, etc., are used more frequently.
f Let your Porsche dealer test the batterys
capacity before winter sets in.
The battery will discharge more quickly if your ve-
hicle is not driven on a daily basis over a distance
of several miles. The more often you drive your ve-
hicle, and the longer the distance driven on each
trip, the more opportunity the vehicles charging
system will have to recharge the batteries.
Replacing battery
The service life of the battery is subject to normal
wear; it depends greatly on care, climatic condi-
tions, and driving conditions (distances, loads).
f Only use an original Porsche battery, with the
correct part number, as a replacement.
f Please observe the disposal instructions for
batteries.
Putting vehicle into operation
After the battery is connected or after an exhaus-
tively discharged battery is charged, the multi-
functional PSM light lights up on the instrument
panel and a message appears on the on-board
computer to indicate a fault.
This fault can be remedied with a few simple
steps:
2. With the vehicle stationary, perform a few
steering movements to the left and right and
then drive a short distance in a straight line
until the multifunctinal PSM light goes out and
the message on the on-board computer
disappears.
3. If the warnings do not disappear, then:
Drive carefully to the nearest authorized
Porsche dealer.
Have the fault remedied.
4. After the warnings disappear:
Stop the vehicle in a suitable place.
f Perform adaptation of the power windows:
Please observe the chapter STORING END
POSITION OF THE WINDOWS on Page 29.
Ignition key/ ignition lock
f Do not insert the ignition key into the ignition
lock if the vehicle battery is discharged.
The ignition key can no longer be removed.
The key cannot be removed until the vehicle elec-
trical system is supplied with power again.
LID on Page 257.
Page 264.
f f f
Removing the battery
The required tool is in the tool kit.
The battery is located in the luggage compart-
ment under a black plastic lid.
Warning!
Risk of damage to alternator and electronic
control units.
f Do not disconnect the battery while the engine
is running.
This also applies to cars equipped with a bat-
tery main switch.
f Never drive the car with a disconnected bat-
tery.
Risk of caustic burns from escaping acid.
f Keep vent caps on to avoid spillage.
f Do not tilt the battery when removing and in-
stalling it.
1. Switch off engine and all electrical loads.
2. Open turn-locks A.
Remove plastic lid.
3. Pull off central vent hose C.
Danger!
Risk of short circuit and explosion.
f Important: disconnect the negative () ground
wire first, and then the positive (+) cable.
4. Unscrew fastening screw B.
5. Remove battery.
Installing the battery
1. Put battery in and push it all the way to the
stop.
2. Screw in fastening screw B.
Danger!
Risk of short circuit and explosion.
f Important: connect the positive (+) cable first,
and then the negative () ground wire.
3. Push on central vent hose C.
4. Fit plastic lid. Lock turn-locks A.
Replacing the remote-control battery
The battery should be changed when the range of
the radio remote control becomes smaller or
when the light-emitting diode no longer flashes
when the remote control is operated.
1. Using your finger nail or a small screwdriver,
carefully lift off the cover of the key grip
(arrow).
2. Replace the battery (paying attention to the
polarity).
Replacement battery Lithium CR 2032,
3 volts
3. Replace the cover and press together firmly.
Please observe the disposal instructions for
batteries.
Note
f Please dispose batteries in compliance with
any and all government regulations.
Emergency Starting with Jumper
Cables
If the battery is discharged, e.g. in winter or after
the car has been parked for a long time, the bat-
tery of another car can be used for starting with
the help of jumper cables.
Make sure the voltage of both batteries is the
same. Both batteries must be 12 volt types.
The capacity (Ampere hours, Ah) of the booster
battery must not be substantially less than that of
the discharged battery.
The discharged battery must be correctly con-
nected to the vehicles electrical system.
Page 258.
LID on Page 257.
Note
f Do not try to start the car by pushing or tow-
ing. Damage to the catalytic converters and
other components of the car may result.
Warning!
Risk of damage and serious personal injury
due to short circuit.
f Use only jumper cables of adequate diameter
cross-section and fitted with completely insu-
lated alligator clips.
f Follow all warnings and instructions of the
jumper cable manufacturer.
f When connecting jumper cables, make sure
that they cannot get caught in any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
The jumper cables must be long enough so
that neither vehicles nor cables touch another.
f The vehicles must not be in contact, otherwise
current might flow as soon as the positive ter-
minals are connected.
f The cable clamps must not be allowed to con-
tact each other when one end of the jumper ca-
bles are connected to a battery.
f Ensure that tools or conductive jewelery (rings,
chains, watch straps) do not come into contact
with the positive jumper cable or the positive
battery post.
f Improper hook-up of jumper cables can ruin
the alternator.
Danger of caustic burns.
f Do not lean over the battery.
Danger of gas explosion.
f Improper use of booster battery to start a
vehicle may cause an explosion, resulting in
severe personal injuries.
f Keep sources of ignition away from the bat-
tery, e.g. open flame, burning cigarettes or
sparking due to cable contact or welding work.
f A discharged battery can freeze even at
23F/ 5C.
Before connecting jumper cables, a frozen bat-
tery must be thawed out.
Connect jumper cables in the following
sequence:
Always observe the sequence below:
1. Connect the positive lead (red) to the
positive terminal of the discharged battery
first, then connect it to the positive terminal of
the donor battery.
2. First connect the negative cable (black) to
the negative terminal of the donor battery, then
connect it to a suitable grounding point on the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
This grounding point must lie as far as possible
from the battery.
For example, a solid metal part or the engine
block are suitable grounding points.
If no suitable grounding points are to be found
on either vehicle, the negative cable must
carefully be connected directly to the negative
terminal of the battery.
If a suitable grounding point is to be found only
on the donor vehicle, the negative cable must
first be connected to the terminal of the
discharged battery, then to the grounding point
of the donor vehicle.
3. Run the engine of the donor car at a higher
speed.
An attempted start using jumper cables should
not last more than 15 seconds. Then allow a
waiting period of at least one minute.
Note
Before disconnecting the jumper cables, electrical
loads such as the heated rear window and the
heating fan blower should be switched on (the ve-
hicles lights must not be switched on). This reduc-
es voltage peaks which may occur when discon-
necting the jumper cables.
With the engine running, remove both jumper ca-
bles in reverse order.
Lights, Replacing Bulbs
Warning!
Risk of short circuit.
f Always switch off the relevant consumer when
changing bulbs.
Risk of injury. The Bi Xenon headlights are
under high voltage when installed.
f Be careful during all work in the area of the Bi
Xenon headlights.
Risk of damage. Bulbs of a higher wattage
can damage the lamp housing.
f Only the bulbs shown in the chart may be used.
f New bulbs must be clean and free from oil,
grease and fingerprints. Therefore, never
touch bulbs with your bare hands.
Use a cloth or soft paper while replacing bulbs.
Caution!
Risk of damage to headlights due to exces-
sive temperatures and abrasion.
f Attach no coverings (e.g. films, stone
guards) in the area of the headlights.
f Use soapy water only to clean light lenses and
plastic headlight lenses.
In no case may chemical cleaners or other vol-
atile cleaning fluids be used.
f To prevent scratches, do not rub with a dry or
merely moist cloth, tissue or insect sponges.
Bulb chart
Type, rating
Halogen low beam H7, 55W
Low beam with Bi-Xenon headlight Philips, D2S 35W
Halogen high beam H9, 65W
Additional high beam with Bi-Xenon headlight H11, 55W
Fog light H8, 35W
Tail light, rear fog light P21/ 4W
Brake light/ tail light P21/ 4W
Tail light, reflector P21/ 5W
Make-up mirror light K3W
Reversing light P21
Trun signal indicator light, front and rear PY21W
Turn signal indicator light, side WY5W
Side marker light W3W
Door guard/ Curb light W5W
Parking light W5WBlue-Vision
License plate light C5W
Luggage compartment/ engine compartment
light, interior light
K10W
Reading light 6WXenon
Headlights
Caution!
Risk of damage to headlights due to abrasion
and excessive temperatures.
f Do not fix any coverings (e.g. stone guards
or films) in the area of the headlights.
Note
The headlights can mist up depending on the
temperature and humidity.
f To ensure optimum ventilation, do not cover
the gap between headlight and body
(e.g. stone guards or films).
Removing headlights
1. Unscrew plastic nut A.
Detach the side carpeting.
2. Remove rubber plug B from the unlocking
opening.
3. Place socket wrench (tool kit) on the unlocking
spindle.
The handle of the wrench should point horizon-
tally to the rear.
4. Turn socket wrench approx. 180 A. The
headlight is unlocked and pushed forward
slightly during this process.
5. Turn socket wrench back until it is pointing
vertically downward B and leave in position.
6. The headlight is now unlocked and can be
pulled forward out of the wing.
Installing
1. Insert headlight into the guide rails and push
fully into the wing.
2. Push headlight to the rear and at the same
time turn the socket wrench until it points
horizontally to the rear C.
The headlight locking device must perceptibly
and audibly engage.
3. Insert the rubber plug into the unlocking
opening and secure the carpet.
Check the function of all lights.
Low beam, high beamand additional high
beam
Opening the lid of the headlight housing
1. Unscrew the 4 screws A.
2. First lift release tab B, then push both release
tabs C upwards and take off lid.
Halogen headlights
Changing bulb for lowbeam
1. Pull off plug A.
2. Disengage fixing loop B.
3. Replace defective bulb.
When doing so, ensure bulb is seated properly.
4. Reassemble in reverse order.
Bi-Xenon headlight
Changing bulb for lowbeam and high beam
1. Turn the plug counter-clockwise (bayonet lock)
and pull it off.
2. Disengage both fixing loops A.
3. Replace defective bulb B.
When doing so, ensure bulb is seated properly.
4. Engage both fixing loops A, push on plug and
turn right as far as the stop.
Changing bulb for high beam or additional
high beam (Bi-Xenon headlight)
1. Turn the bulb holder.
Turn it counter-clockwise on the left headlight
and clockwise on the right headlight.
Take bulb holder out of the headlight housing.
2. Pull both plug release tabs apart.
Pull plug out of the bulb holder.
3. Replace the defective bulb with bulb holder.
Closing lid of headlight housing
1. Push on lid until it perceptibly engages.
2. Fasten lid with the 4 screws.
Changing bulbs for parking light, turn
signal light and fog light
The release card for the auxiliary headlights is
inside the vehicle folder.
1. Insert release card at the side of the auxiliary
headlight.
The auxiliary headlight is released by pushing
in the card.
The card may have to be pushed again to
release the second connection.
2. Remove auxiliary headlight.
Ensure that the vent hose D is not lost when
the auxiliary headlight is pulled out.
A - Parking light
B - Turn signal
C - Fog light
D - Vent hose
Bulb for parking light A
1. Turn holder towards the left and pull it out to
the rear.
2. Pull out and replace defective bulb.
3. Push holder back in and turn towards the right.
Bulb for turn signal B
1. Turn holder counter-clockwise (bayonet lock)
and remove it.
2. Turn the defective bulb counter-clockwise
(bayonet lock) and replace it.
3. Insert holder and turn towards the right.
Bulb for fog light C
1. Press the release tab of the plug and pull plug
off.
2. Turn bulb of the defective left fog light towards
the left and the bulb of the right fog light
towards the right (bayonet lock) and replace
them.
3. Push on plug.
Installing auxiliary headlight
f Ensure that the cables are inside the guide
(arrows) properly.
Caution!
Risk of paint damage if the auxiliary head-
light is inserted into the front apron when tilt-
ed.
f Exercise caution when inserting the auxiliary
headlight into the guides of the front apron.
f Ensure that the guide of the housing is inserted
into the guide A of the front apron.
f Push auxiliary headlight into the front apron
until it is felt to engage.
Changing bulb for side marker light
1. Remove the cap in the wheel housing liner with
a screwdriver.
2. Insert the screwdriver into the opening in the
wheel housing liner at right angles to the turn
signal housing.
By pressing with the screwdriver, disengage
the securing spring of the turn signal housing.
3. Swivel out the indicator light and undo bulb
holder (bayonet lock).
4. Remove the bulb from the holder and replace
it. Insert holder.
Check operation of the light.
5. Insert the turn signals retaining lugs A into the
side section at the front.
Push in turn signal until the securing spring B
is felt to engage.
6. Press the cap into the wheel housing liner.
Tail Light
Changing bulb
1. Open the engine compartment lid.
2. Completely unscrew fastening screw A.
3. Pull tail light out towards the back.
A- Reversing light
B- Turn signal
C- Tail light/ brake light
D- Tail light/ reflector
E - Rear fog light/ side marker light
4. Turn the bulb holder in the tail light housing
counter-clockwise and pull it out.
5. Turn the defective bulb counter-clockwise
(bayonet lock) and replace it.
6. Insert the bulb holder and turn it clockwise.
7. Insert tail light into the side section.
Ensure that the retaining lug has been inserted
into the mounting guide properly.
8. Tighten fastening screw A on the tail light.
9. Check operation of the light.
License Plate Light
Changing bulb
1. Unscrew both screws A and remove the light
lens.
2. Remove defective bulb from between the
contact springs and replace it.
Check operation of the light.
Example: Luggage compartment light
Luggage Compartment/Engine
Compartment/Footwell Light
Changing bulb
1. With a screwdriver (arrow), carefully push out
the light.
2. Remove defective bulb from between the
contact springs and replace.
3. Insert the light into the cut-out, first from one
side then from the other. Check operation.
Door Guard/Curb Light
Changing bulb
1. With a screwdriver (arrow), carefully push out
the light.
2. Pull bulb holder out of light housing. Remove
defective bulb and replace.
3. Install bulb holder and insert light.
Interior Light, Reading Lights
Changing bulb
1. Carefully pull light housing out of the trim
(arrow).
2. Reading light
Turn the holder A of the defective bulb counter-
clockwise and pull it out.
Remove bulb and replace.
Interior light
Carefully unclip the light lens on the switch side
(arrows) and then detach it.
Remove defective bulb from between the
contact springs and replace.
Clip light lens back in.
3. Insert the light housing into the trim, rear end
first.
Press front of housing up and click into place.
Check operation of lights.
Additional brake lights
The light-emitting diodes of the additional brake
lights cannot be replaced individually.
f Have the defective brake light replaced at an
Adjusting Headlights
f Please observe the chapter LIGHTS, REPLA-
CING BULBS on Page 266.
Adjustment
The adjustment is made with the vehicle ready to
drive and the fuel tank completely filled.
The drivers seat must be loaded by a person or a
165 lbs. (75 kg) weight and the tire pressures
must meet the prescribed values.
After being loaded, the car must be rolled a few
meters so that the suspension can settle.
For checking the headlight adjustment, the verti-
cal position of the cutoff of the lowbeam (see fig.)
has to be projected on a vertical screen (wall) in
distance of 7.5 m (24.6 ft.) from the front lens of
the headlamp.
The correct position of the cutoff is 5 cm (2.0 in.)
at 7.5 m or 24.6 ft. (0.4) below a horizontal line,
x cm from ground to the center of the headlamp
lens.
Lateral adjustment of the headlights should be
carried out at a specialist workshop with an optical
adjustment unit.
Distance
Visual aim shall be performed at not less than
7.5 m (this value is a rounded down conversion
from the 25-foot distance typical of field aim using
a screen). The 7.5 m (24.6 ft.) distance is meas-
ured from the headlamp lens to the viewing
screen.
f f f
Floor
The surface upon which the vehicle rests is flat
and approximately level.
Screen
The screen upon which headlamp beams are pro-
jected is perpendicular to the floor and the vehi-
cles longitudinal axis, flat, uniformly light in color,
unobstructed, and wide and high enough to ac-
commodate the vehicle beam patterns to be
aimed.
The screen should be wide enough to provide at
least 1 m (3.3 ft.) of space outboard of the vehi-
cles headlamp spacing.
Adjustment screws
f Detach side carpeting in luggage compart-
ment.
Therefore unscrew plastic nut A.
Open the cover of the appropriate adjustment
screw.
The setting is adjusted by turning the hexagon
socket screws right or left, as appropriate.
B - Headlight vertical adjustment
Vertical adjustment (screwB)
f turn clockwise = beam moves down
turn counter-clockwise = beam moves up
Note
f Do not alter the lateral adjustment.
Towing
Certain state statutes and local ordinances prohib-
it towing with a chain, rope or even a tow bar.
In addition, damage to your vehicle may result
from improper procedures.
Consult your authorized Porsche dealer for de-
tails.
Vehicle towing
Flat bed towing is the preferred type of towing to
be used on Porsche vehicles.
Under certain circumstances, wheel lifts may be
used when the vehicle will not roll.
The vehicle must be towed with all four
wheels off the ground, otherwise damage to
the vehicle may result.
Towing hook
The towing hook is contained in the tool kit.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the vehicle.
f Use the towing hook only for an emergency to
remove the vehicle off the road. The towing
hook is to be used only to pull the vehicle onto
the flat bed, tractor or towing aparatus if the
vehicle will roll freely. Under no circumstances
is the vehicle to be secured using the towing
hook.
f Never use the towing hook to tow this or any
other vehicle.
f Bear in mind the limited ground clearance of
your car on uneven surfaces.
Front mounting
The towing hook is A stored in the tool box in the
1. Press the lower edge of the appropriate
plastic cover into the bumper until the cover
disengages.
2. Pull cover out of the bumper and let it hang by
its thread.
3. Completely screw in the towing hook.
Rear mounting
1. Remove license plate.
2. Unscrew the towing hook A.
3. Insert plastic cover at the lower edge of the
opening.
4. Fold the cover up and press on its upper edge
to engage it in the bumper.
5. Completely screw in the towing hook.
Pulling vehicle onto flat bed
1. Position wooden ramps at the base of the flat
bed to reduce the angle of the pull.
2. Reel in the hoist cable and check the underside
of the vehicle for any interference.
Tieing down vehicle on flat bed
1. Carefully feed towing straps through the open-
ing in the rear wheels.
Make sure metal parts of straps do not dam-
age rim.
Make sure the strap is flat over the rim bead.
Make sure brake backing plate is not dam-
aged.
2. Secure straps to rear of flat bed.
3. Reel in hoist cable only far enough to tension
tie-down straps.
4. Carefully feed towing straps through the open-
ing in the front wheels.
Make sure metal parts of straps do not dam-
age rim.
Make sure the strap is flat over the rim bead.
Make sure brake backing plate is not dam-
aged.
5. Secure straps to front of flat bed.
6. Release tension on hoist cable, but do not dis-
connect.
Use hoist cable as a safety cable.
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 283
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data
284 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data
Vehicle Identification
When ordering spare parts or making inquiries,
please always quote the vehicle identification
number.
Vehicle data bank
The vehicle data bank is attached to the inside of
the Maintenance booklet.
It contains all important data about your vehicle.
Note
This data bank cannot be re-ordered if it is lost or
damaged.
This label contains the following information:
1. Vehicle Identification No.
2. Type/ Type description
3. Engine code/ Transmission code
4. Paint No./ Interior
5. Optional equipment
Vehicle identification number
In accordance with Federal Safety Regulations,
the vehicle identification number of your car is lo-
cated at the bottom left of the windshield frame
and can be seen from the outside.
The vehicle identification number is in the luggage
compartment under the battery cover and at the
bottom left behind the windshield.
Removing the battery cover
page 258.
Safety compliance sticker
The safety compliance sticker is your assurance
that your new Porsche complies with all applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards which
were in effect at the time the vehicle was manufac-
tured.
The sticker also shows the month and year of pro-
duction and the vehicle identification number of
your car (perforations) as well as the Gross Vehi-
cle Weight Rating and the Gross Axle Weight Rat-
ing.
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 285
Tire pressure plate
The tire pressure plate is attached to the left-hand
door aperture.
Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the underside
of the crankcase.
286 Technical Data
Technical Data
Engine data
911 Carrera, 911 Carrera 4 911 Carrera S, 911 Carrera 4S 911 Carrera S, 911 Carrera 4S
(increased performance version)
Type M 96/ 05 M 97/ 01 M 97/ 01S
Horizontally opposed engine,
liquid cooled
liquid cooled
liquid cooled
Number of cylinders 6 6 6
Bore 3.78 in./ 96 mm 3.90 in./ 99 mm 3.90 in./ 99 mm
Stroke 3.26 in./ 82.8 mm 3.26 in./ 82.8 mm 3.26 in./ 82.8 mm
Cubic capacity 219.4 cu. in./ 3596 cm
3
233.3 cu. in./ 3824 cm
3
233.3 cu. in./ 3824 cm
3
Net-horsepower, SAE J 1349 325 hp/ 239 kW 355 hp/ 261 kW 381 hp/ 280 kW
at crankshaft speed 6800 rpm 6600 rpm 7200 rpm
Net torque, SAE J 1349 273 ft. lb./ 370 Nm 295 ft. lb./ 400 Nm 307 ft. lb./ 415 Nm
at crankshaft speed 4250 rpm 4600 rpm 5500 rpm
Engine control Stationary high-voltage distribution, sequential injection,
cylinder-selective knock-control, stereo oxygen sensor closed-loop control, diagnostic system,
4 overhead camshafts, Porsche VarioCam Plus, hydraulic valve clearance compensation
Technical Data 287
Transmission
Manual transmission Tiptronic S
1st gear 3.91 3.60
2nd gear 2.32 2.19
3rd gear 1.61 1.41
4th gear 1.28 1.00
5th gear 1.08 0.83
6th gear 0.88
Reverse 1st gear 3.59 3.17
2nd gear 1.93
Final drive ratio 3.44 3.56
288 Technical Data
Tires, Rims, Tracks 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S
Tire Rim Rim offset Track
Summer tires* front 235/ 40 ZR 18 (91Y) 8 J x 18 H2 57 mm 58.5 in./ 1486 mm
rear 265/ 40 ZR 18 (101Y) XL 10 J x 18 H2 58 mm 60.4 in./ 1534 mm
or front 235/ 35 ZR 19 (87Y) 8 J x 19 H2 57 mm 58.5 in./ 1486 mm
rear 295/ 30 ZR 19 (100Y) XL 11 J x 19 H2 67 mm 59.7 in./ 1516 mm
or front 235/ 35 ZR 19 (87Y) 8.5 J x 19 H2 55 mm 58.7 in./ 1490 mm
rear 305/ 30 ZR 19 (102Y) XL 11.5 J x 19 H2 67 mm 59.7 in./ 1516 mm
Snowtires front 235/ 40 R 18 91V M+S 8 J x 18 H2 57 mm 58.5 in./ 1486 mm
rear 265/ 40 R 18 97V M+S** 10 J x 18 H2 58 mm 60.4 in./ 1534 mm
or front 235/ 35 R 19 87V M+S 8 J x 19 H2 57 mm 58.5 in./ 1486 mm
rear 295/ 30 R 19 100V XL M+S 11 J x 19 H2 67 mm 59.7 in./ 1516 mm
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. 91) and maximum speed code letter (e.g. Y) are minimum requirements.
Snowchains Can be mounted only on the rear wheels; maximum speed 30 mph (50 km/ h).
Use only Porsche authorized fine-link cross-type or edge chains.
Snowchain clearance can be guaranteed only on the tire +rim combination marked** without spacers.
Tire and rim sizes Extensive tests are performed before specific tires and wheels are approved by Porsche. Your Porsche dealer has informa-
tion about approved tires and wheels and is happy to assist you.
If aftermarket tires and/ or wheels are installed which are not approved by Porsche, the vehicles roadability and handling
characteristics might be impaired. Since Porsche has no data on such combinations, Porsche cannot stand behind the safe-
ty or durability of these aftermarket combinations.
* 911 Carrera S: Summer tires 19-inch only
Technical Data 289
Tires, Rims, Tracks 911 Carrera 4, 911 Carrera 4S
Tire Rim Rim offset Track
Summer tires* front 235/40 ZR 18 (91Y) 8 J x 18 H2 57 mm 58.6 in./1488 mm
rear 295/35 ZR 18 (99Y) 11 J x 18 H2 51 mm 60.9 in./1548 mm
or front 235/35 ZR 19 (87Y) 8 J x 19 H2 57 mm 58.6 in./1488 mm
rear 305/30 ZR 19 (102Y) XL 11 J x 19 H2 51 mm 60.9 in./1548 mm
or front 235/35 ZR 19 (87Y) 8.5 J x 19 H2 55 mm 58.7 in./1492 mm
rear 305/30 ZR 19 (102Y) XL 11.5 J x 19 H2** 67 mm 61.0 in./1550 mm
Snow tires front 235/40 R 18 91V M+S 8 J x 18 H2 57 mm 58.6 in./1488 mm
rear 295/35 R 18 99V M+S*** 11 J x 18 H2 51 mm 60.9 in./1548 mm
or front 235/35 R 19 87V M+S 8 J x 19 H2 57 mm 58.6 in./1488 mm
rear 295/30 R 19 100V XL M+S*** 11 J x 19 H2 51 mm 60.9 in./1548 mm
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. 91) and maximum speed code letter (e.g. Y) are minimum requirements.
Snow chains Can be mounted only on the rear wheels; maximum speed 30 mph (50 km/h).
Use only Porsche authorized fine-link cross-type or edge chains.
Snow chain clearance can be guaranteed only on the tire + rim combination marked***.
Tire and rim sizes Extensive tests are performed before specific tires and wheels are approved by Porsche. Your Porsche dealer has information
about approved tires and wheels and is happy to assist you.
If aftermarket tires and/or wheels are installed which are not approved by Porsche, the vehicles roadability and handling cha-
racteristics might be impaired. Since Porsche has no data on such combinations, Porsche cannot stand behind the safety or
durability of these aftermarket combinations.
* 911 Carrera 4S: Summer tires 19-inch only ** Only approved together with 17 mm spacers
290 Technical Data
Tire Pressures for cold tires
Summer and snowtires 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S
Summer and snowtires 911 Carrera 4, 911 Carrera 4S
These tire filling pressures apply only to the tire makes and types approved by Porsche.
Please observe the chapter TIRES/ WHEELS on Page 229. Please observe the chapter TPC TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING on Page 109.
Danger!
Installation of sizes not authorized by
Porsche may have a dangerous effect on
the driving stability and could result in
severe personal injury or death.
f Before mounting new tires, check with your
Porsche dealer about the current release status.
18 inch wheels front 36 psi (2.5 bar)
rear 44 psi (3.0 bar)
19 inch wheels, partially loaded front 33 psi (2.3 bar)
19 inch wheels, fully loaded front 36 psi (2.5 bar)
18 inch and 19 inch wheels, partially loaded front 33 psi (2.3 bar)
18 inch and 19 inch wheels, fully loaded front 36 psi (2.5 bar)
Technical Data 291
Capacities
Use only fluids and fuels authorized by Porsche. Your authorized Porsche dealer will gladly advise you.
Your Porsche has been designed so that it is not necessary to mix any additives with oils or fuels.
Engine 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera 4: Oil change quantity without oil filter approx. 8.5 quarts / 8.0 liters
911 Carrera, 911 Carrera 4: Oil change quantity with oil filter approx. 8.7 quarts / 8.25 liters
911 Carrera S, 911 Carrera 4S: Oil change quantity without oil filter approx. 8.7 quarts / 8.25 liters
911 Carrera S, 911 Carrera 4S: Oil change quantity with oil filter approx. 9 quarts / 8.5 liters
Please observe the chapter ENGINE OIL on Page 201.
Coolant approx. 8.45 U.S. gallons / 32 liters
Manual transmission
and differential
approx. 3.1 quarts / 2.9 liters transmission oil
Tiptronic S approx. 9.5 quarts / 9 liters ATF
Differential for Tiptronic S approx. 1.3 quarts / 1.2 liter
Fuel tank 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S: approx. 16.9 U.S. gallons / 64 liters
911 Carrera 4, 911 Carrera 4S: approx. 17.7 U.S. gallons / 67 liters
Fuel quality Your engine is designed to provide optimum performance and fuel economy using
unleaded premium fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON (93 CLC or AKI).
Porsche therefore recommends the use of these fuels in your vehicle.
Porsche also recognizes that these fuels may not always be available. Be assured that your vehicle
will operate properly on unleaded premium fuels with octane numbers of at least 95 RON (90 CLC or AKI),
since the engines Electronic Oktane knock control will adapt the ignition timing, if necessary.
Power steering approx. 1.35 quarts / 1.27 liter hydraulic fluid Pentosin CHF 11 S
or Pentosin CHF 202

Brake fluid 0.48 quarts / 0.45 liters; use only Original Porsche brake fluid.
Windshield washer approx. 2.6 quarts / 2,5 liters without headlight washer
approx. 6.3 quarts / 6 liters with headlight washer
292 Technical Data
Weights Coup
911 Carrera Manual transmission Tiptronic S
Empty weight (depending on equipment) 1395 kg to 1495 kg 1435 kg to 1535 kg
3075 lbs. to 3296 lbs. 3164 lbs. to 3384 lbs.
Maximum gross weight 3990 lbs./ 1810 kg 4090 lbs./ 1855 kg
Maximum axle load, front* 1709 lbs./ 775 kg 1709 lbs./ 775 kg
Maximum axle load, rear* 2601 lbs./ 1180 kg 2601 lbs./ 1180 kg
Maximum useful load, Roof Transport System** 165 lbs./ 75 kg 165 lbs./ 75 kg
911 Carrera S Manual transmission Tiptronic S
* The maximum gross weight must not be exceeded.
Note: If additional accessories are installed, the useful load will be correspondingly less.
** Use only Original Porsche Roof Transport System.
Technical Data 293
Weights Coup
911 Carrera 4 Manual transmission Tiptronic S
911 Carrera 4S Manual transmission Tiptronic S
** Use only Original Porsche Roof Transport System.
294 Technical Data
Weights Cabriolet
911 Carrera S Manual transmission Tiptronic S
Technical Data 295
Weights Cabriolet
911 Carrera 4S Manual transmission Tiptronic S
296 Technical Data
Driving Performance Coup*
* At DIN empty weight and half load, without performance-inhibiting extra equipment
Top speed 177 mph (285 km/ h) 174 mph (280 km/ h)
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/ h (62 mph) 5.0 seconds 5.5 seconds
911 Carrera S Manual transmission Tiptronic S Manual transmission
(increased performance
version)
Tiptronic S
version)
Top speed 182 mph (293 km/ h) 177 mph (285 km/ h) 187 mph (300 km/ h) 183 mph (294 km/ h)
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/ h (62 mph) 4.8 seconds 5.3 seconds 4.6 seconds 5.1 seconds
911 Carrera 4S Manual transmission Tiptronic S Manual transmission
version)
Tiptronic S
version)
Technical Data 297
Driving Performance Cabriolet*
* At DIN empty weight and half load, without performance-inhibiting extra equipment
911 Carrera S Manual transmission Tiptronic S Manual transmission
version)
Tiptronic S
version)
911 Carrera 4S Manual transmission Tiptronic S Manual transmission
version)
Tiptronic S
version)
298 Technical Data
Dimensions
911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S 911 Carrera 4, 911 Carrera 4S
Length 175.6 in./ 4461 mm 175.6 in./ 4461 mm
Width 71.2 in./ 1808 mm 72.9 in./ 1852 mm
Height 51.6 in./ 1310 mm 51.6 in./ 1310 mm
Wheelbase 92.5 in./ 2350 mm 92.5 in./ 2350 mm
Ground clearance
at maximum gross weight
911 Carrera: 4.1 in./ 104 mm 911 Carrera 4: 4.1 in./ 103 mm
Turning circle 35.8 ft./ 10.9 m 35.8 ft./ 10.9 m
Vehicles with PASM
Height 51.2 in./ 1300 mm 51.2 in./ 1300 mm
Ground clearance
at maximum gross weight
911 Carrera: 3.9 in./ 99 mm
911 Carrera S: 4.1 in./ 103 mm
911 Carrera 4: 3.7 in./ 95 mm
911 Carrera 4S: 3.9 in./ 98 mm
Technical Data 299
Diagrams
Acceleration diagram
Values have been determined at DIN empty weight
and with a 50 %load without additional equipment.
Transmission diagram
The transmission diagram is based on standard
values on the basis of a mean effective scrub ra-
dius. Changes of the scrub radius, the tire toler-
ance, wear and tear, deviating country equipment
and tire slip have not been taken into account.
Engine diagramat full power 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera 4
300 Technical Data
Engine diagramat full power 911 Carrera S, 911 Carrera 4S
Technical Data 301
Acceleration diagramfor manual transmission 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera 4
302 Technical Data
Acceleration diagramfor manual transmission 911 Carrera S, 911 Carrera 4S
Technical Data 303
304 Index
Index
A
ABS (antilock brake system) ..........................69
Warning light ........................................70
Air distribution............................................138
Air filter......................................................215
Airbag..........................................................45
Function...............................................46
Warning light ..................................49, 57
Air-conditioning compressor ................138, 140
Alarm system.......................................26, 161
Alcantara...................................................226
Antenna.............................................161, 221
Antifreeze...................................................199
Antilock brake system (ABS)..........................69
Warning light ........................................70
Ashtray......................................................142
Assembly aids for wheel changes.................250
Audio operation..................................159, 160
Auto-button, air conditioning........................138
Automatic ..................................................215
Air conditioning system.......................138
Anti-glare mirrors..................................32
Car washes ........................................221
Door locking.........................................21
Headlight adjustment...........................132
Speed control...................... 88, 136, 137
Average consumption...........................99, 121
Average speed.....................................99, 121
B
Backrest
Adjustment...........................................34
Release................................................34
Battery.......................................................258
Care..................................................259
Charging............................................259
Putting vehicle into operation...............261
Remote control...................................263
Removing...........................................262
Warning light.........................................96
Winter operation.................................260
Before driving off................................... 14, 15
Belts................................................... 42, 226
Height adjustment.................................44
Tensioner.............................................42
Warning light.........................................43
Blower adjustment ............................. 139, 141
Brake light......................................... 276, 278
Brakes.......................................................205
Brake circuit division warning light........206
Brake pad warning light.........................97
Fluid.......................................... 205, 291
Fluid warning light ...................... 116, 206
Pads............................................. 16, 68
Parking brake.......................................65
Roller brake tester ................................62
Test stand............................................74
Break in hints................................................16
Bulbs, replacing..........................................266
C
Cabriolet ....................................................176
Canholder...................................................144
Capacities ..................................................291
Car care.....................................................218
Car telephone.............................................161
Car washes ................................................219
Carpet........................................................225
Catalytic converters ....................................212
Cautions............................................ 198, 228
Central locking..............................................22
emergency operation.............................23
Central vents ..............................................141
Central warning light......................................97
Changing wheels.........................................250
Check engine
Warning light.........................................97
Checking pressure......................................251
Child restraint
Anchorages ..........................................56
Child restraint systems ..................................51
Chime........................................................131
CHRONO stopwatch....................................104
Cigarette lighter..........................................143
Circulating-air button....................................139
Clock.................................................. 95, 121
Clothes hook..............................................146
Clutch................................................. 65, 164
Comfort seat................................................34
Coming Home mode...................................131
Index 305
Compact disc
Player and Changer.............................160
Storage..............................................147
Compartment monitoring...............................26
Compressor...............................................151
Convertible top...........................................176
Care..................................................220
Coolant................................................92, 199
Level..................................................199
Temperature gauge..............................92
Warning light ........................................92
Cooling system.....................................92, 199
Cruise control.............................. 96, 136, 137
Cupholder ..................................................144
D
Dashboard...................................................78
Data bank..................................................284
Defrosting windows...............................33, 139
Diagnostic socket.................................17, 256
Diagrams...................................................299
Dimensions ................................................298
Door............................................................21
Guard lights........................................277
Handles................................................21
Locks...........................................21, 221
Mirror ..................................................32
Mirror heating.......................................33
Windows ....................... 21, 28, 176, 223
Driving hints .................................................14
Driving in winter..........................................170
Driving performance...........................296, 297
Drop-center rim..........................................241
DVD Navigation...................................150, 158
DVD navigation...........................................151
Dynamometer testing....................................61
E
Electrical system.........................................254
Emergency flasher ......................................130
Emergency operation
Central locking......................................23
Lids ...................................................257
Sliding roof.........................................174
Tank flap............................................208
Emergency service......................................228
Emergency starting
with jumper cables............................. 264, 265
Emission control system...........7, 97, 211, 212
Engine
Checking the oil level...........................118
Exhaust..................................................9
Number..............................................285
Oil consumption........................... 16, 201
Oil level ..............................................201
Oil level indicator.................................118
Oil pressure..........................................96
Oil temperature.....................................88
Oils........................................... 201, 291
Speeds ............................... 16, 296, 297
Starting................................................82
Stopping..............................................83
Engine compartment
Blower .......................................... 83, 92
Lid............................................ 148, 149
Lid warning light..................................148
Light ..................................................277
Environment ...................................................6
F
Filling pressure, tire................................ 5, 290
Fire extinguisher......................................... 154
Floor mats................................................. 225
Fluids and fuels.......................................... 291
Fog lights .................................................. 131
Footbrake.................................................... 66
Footwell lights............................................ 277
Four-wheel drive..................................... 61, 62
Fresh air intake.......................................... 141
Front lid..................................................... 149
Fuel................................................. 4, 94, 208
Containers..................................... 8, 210
Economy........................................... 207
Evaporation control ............................ 213
Level gauge......................................... 94
Level warning light................................ 94
Recommendation....................... 209, 210
Tank.................................................. 209
Function keys............................................... 40
Fuses........................................................ 256
G
Garage door opener................................... 155
Garage lift ................................................. 244
Glove compartment.................................... 147
Gong.....................................18, 81, 100, 131
Ground clearance........................................... 9
306 Index
H
Handbrake...................................................65
Hardtop.....................................................189
Headlights..........................................132, 268
Adjusting....................................279, 280
Cleaning system................ 133, 213, 291
Headlights beam adjustment........................132
Heated rear window......................................33
Heater .......................................................138
High beam
Indicator light........................................91
Lever.................................................131
Home mode...............................................131
HomeLink...................................................155
Hoods................................................148, 149
Horn............................................... 17, 22, 24
I
Ignition lock..................................................80
Immobilizer ..................................................19
Indicator lights..............................................84
Instrument....................................................84
Illumination...........................................88
Lights ................................................131
Panel ...........................................78, 122
Interior lights................................................76
Interior mirror.........................................30, 32
J
J umper cables....................................235, 264
K
Keys ..................................................... 19, 20
L
LATCH System..............................................55
Leather care...............................................225
License plate light.............................. 131, 277
Lids ...........................................................149
Emergency unlocking..........................257
Lifting/ sliding roof.......................................172
Light
Flasher................................ 91, 131, 132
Low beam................................. 131, 132
Sensor for instrument illumination...........84
Switch....................................... 131, 132
Light alloy wheels
Inscription..........................................241
Load switch-off ...........................................255
Loading information....................................242
Locking........................................................22
Conditions............................................24
Lowering......................................................57
Luggage carrier................................. 292, 293
Luggage compartment................................150
Lid.....................................................148
Lid warning light..................................148
Light..................................................277
Luggage compartment/
engine compartment lid, warning lights.........148
Luggage rack.............................................195
M
Maintenance...............................................198
Make-up mirror .............................................41
Maximum permitted engine speeds ....... 16, 164
Mirrors............................................ 30, 32, 60
Anti-glare..............................................32
Multi-functional steering wheel........................40
N
Navigation..................................................158
Notes on
Car care.............................................218
Maintenance.......................................198
Number plate light.............................. 131, 277
O
Octane rating..................................... 209, 210
Off delay....................................................131
Oil..............................................................201
Checking level.....................................118
Consumption.........................................16
Level checks.......................................201
Level indicator ....................................118
Pressure...............................................96
Temperature.........................................88
On-board computer .......................................98
Basic settings.....................................120
Language versions..............................120
On-board literature..........................................2
Orientation light ............................................76
Outside temperatur indicator..........................95
Index 307
P
Paint
Care..................................................218
Data...................................................285
ParkAssistant ...............................................58
Parking......................................................170
Parking aids ...........................................58, 60
Parking brake...............................................65
Warning light ........................................66
Parking light.......................................131, 132
Particle filter...............................................215
Passenger compartment monitoring...............26
Plastic parts...............................................224
Platform lift ................................................244
(PASM).........................................................75
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB).......8
Porsche Communication Management (PCM) 158
Porsche Stability Management (PSM)..............72
Information light....................................74
Power measurement.....................................61
Power measurements .................................198
Power steering fluid level.....................214, 291
Power windows.............................. 21, 28, 176
Practical tips ..............................................228
R
Radiator fan.........................................83, 200
Radio reception..........................................159
Rain sensor................................................133
Range on remaining fuel........................99, 121
Reading light ........................................76, 278
Rear fog light .............................................131
Rear lid......................................................148
Rear seat backrests......................................39
Rear spoiler..................................................63
Rear view mirrors................................... 30, 32
Rear window defogger...................................33
Rear window wiper......................................134
Recycling.......................................................7
Reduced driving program, Tiptronic..............170
Relays........................................................254
Release button............................................165
Remote control.............................................20
Replacement key..........................................19
Replacing bulbs ..........................................266
Replacing wiper blades................................216
Rims
Diameter ............................................241
Rim width...........................................241
Rollover Protection System............................57
Roof Transport System............... 195, 292, 293
Running in....................................................16
S
Safety belts......................................... 42, 226
Height adjustment.................................44
Tensioner .............................................42
Warning light.........................................43
Safety compliance sticker............................284
Sealing set.................................................246
Seals .........................................................224
Seat
Adjustment...........................................34
Heating................................................38
Memory................................................36
Selector lever.............................................165
Selector lever position indicator ............ 93, 166
Shifting gear.............................................. 164
Side marker light................................ 131, 275
Side vents ................................................. 141
Sliding roof................................................ 172
Snow chains .............................................. 239
Snow tires................................................. 238
Socket ...................................................... 254
Spacers ............................................ 249, 252
Spare key.............................................. 19, 20
Speed code letter ...................................... 240
Speed control .............................. 88, 136, 137
Speed limit ........................................ 100, 240
Speedometer............................................... 90
Spoiler ........................................................ 63
Sport Chrono Package
CHRONO stopwatch............................ 104
Sport mode......................................... 71
Sport mode........................................... 71, 75
Sports seat ................................................. 34
Sport-type running gear.............................. 298
Stability management system........................ 72
Starting....................................................... 81
Starting engine............................................ 82
Steering lock............................................... 80
Steering wheel
Adjustment .......................................... 39
Function keys....................................... 40
Lock.................................................... 81
Rocker switches................................. 165
Stopping engine........................................... 83
Stopwatch................................................. 104
Storage options......................................... 146
Storing your Porsche.................................. 226
Sun visors ................................................... 41
308 Index
T
Tachometer..................................................91
Tank......................................... 208, 209, 291
Ventilation system...............................213
Technical data............................................286
Telephone..................................................161
Temperature setting....................................138
Temperature, outside indicator.......................95
Test stand, measurements ............................74
Theft protection............................................18
Tightening torque for wheel bolts.................252
Tiptronic ....................................................165
Indicator...............................................93
Tire pressure monitoring.............................109
Tires................................... 16, 229, 288, 289
Care..................................................229
Checking pressure..............................251
Inscription..........................................240
Loading information............................242
Pressure............................... 5, 232, 290
Pressure monitoring............................109
Pressure plate....................................285
Sealant ......................................245, 246
Sidewall .............................................240
Size...................................................240
Tool kit.......................................................151
Tools .................................................150, 151
Towing...................................... 170, 281, 282
Towing lug..................................................151
Tow-starting ...............................................170
Tracks ...............................................288, 289
Transmission......................................164, 287
Fluid...........................................215, 291
Trunk entrapment .......................................152
Turn signals......................................... 91, 132
Tyre pressure
Compressor .......................................151
Tyres
Sealant...............................................151
U
Undercoating..................................... 211, 223
V
Valves........................................................236
Vanity mirror.................................................41
Vehicle
Care..................................................218
Data...................................................284
Identification label ...............................284
Identification number...........................284
Putting into operation..........................261
Washing.............................................219
Ventilation..................................................138
Vents ................................................ 138, 141
Viscosity, engine oil.....................................204
W
Warning lights and messages.......................122
Washer
Fluid.......................................... 213, 291
Lever .................................................133
Washing.....................................................219
Weights............................................. 292, 293
Welcome Home Function.............................131
Wheel..........................16, 224, 229, 288, 289
Bolts ..................................................248
Care...................................................229
Changing............................................245
Checking pressure..............................251
Inscription...........................................240
Loading information.............................242
Securing wheel bolts .............................19
Security wheel bolts ............................151
Sidewall..............................................240
Size...................................................240
Tire pressure......................... 5, 232, 290
Tire pressure plate..............................285
Tire sealant................................ 245, 246
Windows...................................... 28, 176, 223
Washer nozzles...................................133
Washer system.................. 133, 213, 291
Windshield wiper/ washer lever .....................133
Windshield wipers .............................. 133, 216
Replacing...........................................216
Windstop....................................................185
Winter operation
Battery...............................................260
Coolant ..............................................199
Engine oil............................................200
J umper cables ........................... 264, 265
Locks.................................................221
Seals..................................................224
Snow chains .......................................239
Tires ................................. 238, 288, 289
Washer fluid........................................213
Wiper blades.......................................216
Wiper
Blades................................................216
Rear...................................................134

Porsche 911 Carrera Owners Manual 2006

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Porsche 911 Carrera Owners Manual 2006

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Porsche 911 Carrera Owners Manual 2006

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What safety precautions does the manual emphasize?

What should you do if you notice any damage to your vehicle?

Dr. Ing. h.c. F.

or Pentosin CHF 202

You might also like